sat practice tests booklet
TRANSCRIPT
SAT
Practice Tests
5
10
Contents
Practice Test 1
Section 1 Writing – Essay ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2
Section 2 Critical Reading …………………………………………………………...…………………………. 3
Section 5 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 7
Section 7 Writing ………………………………………………………………………………………….......... 13
Section 8 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 19
Section 10 Writing ……………………………………………………………………………………………...... 22
Practice Test 2
Section 1 Writing – Essay …………………………………………………………...……………………….… 25
Section 2 Critical Reading ……………………………………………..……………………………………….. 26
Section 5 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 31
Section 7 Writing ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 36
Section 8 Critical Reading ……………………………………………..……………………………………….. 42
Section 10 Writing …………………………………………………………………………..…………………… 46
Practice Test 3
Section 1 Writing – Essay ……………………………………………………………………………………… 49
Section 3 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 50
Section 6 Writing ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 56
Section 7 Critical Reading ………………………………………………………………….…………………... 62
Section 9 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 67
Section 10 Writing ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 71
Practice Test 4
Section 1 Writing – Essay ……………………………………………………………………………………… 74
Section 3 Writing ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 75
Section 4 Critical Reading ………………………………………………………………..…………………….. 81
Section 6 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 87
Section 9 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 92
Section 10 Writing …………………………………………………………………..…………………………… 96
Practice Test 5
Section 1 Writing – Essay ……………………………………………………………………………………… 99
Section 4 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………….……………………... 100
Section 5 Writing …………………………………………………………………..…………………………... 105
Section 7 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 111
Section 8 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 117
Section 10 Writing …………………………………………………………………………..…………………… 121
Practice Test 6
Section 1 Writing – Essay ……………………………………………………………………………………… 124
Section 2 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 125
Section 4 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………………………… 130
Section 6 Writing …………………………………………………………………………..…………………… 136
Section 8 Critical Reading ……………………………………………………………………...………………. 142
Practice Test 1Section 10 Writing …………………………………………………………………..….………………………... 145
SECTION 1 WRITING – ESSAY
Time – 25 minutes
The essay gives you an opportunity to show how effectively you can develop and express ideas. You should, therefore, takecare to develop your point of view, present your ideas logically and clearly, and use language precisely.
Your essay must be written on the lines provided on your answer sheet – you will receive no other paper on which to write.You will have enough space if you write on every line, avoid wide margins, and keep your handwriting to a reasonable size.Remember that people who are not familiar with your handwriting will read what you write. Try to write or print so that whatyou are writing is legible to those readers.
You have twenty-five minutes to write an essay on the topic assigned below. DO NOT WRITE ON ANOTHER TOPIC.AN OFF-TOPIC ESSAY WILL RECEIVE A SCORE OF ZERO.
Think carefully about the issue presented in the following quotations and the assignment below.
Assignment: What motivates people to change? Plan and write an essay in which you develop your point of view on thisissue. Support your position with reasoning and examples taken from your reading, studies, experience, orobservations.
2
To change is to risk something, making us feel insecure. Not to change is a bigger risk, thoughwe seldom feel that way. There is no choice but to change. People, however, cannot bemotivated to change from the outside. All of our motivation comes from within.
Adapted from Ward Sybouts, Planning in School Administration: A Handbook
5
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Practice Test 1
SECTION 2 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. The ------- of Maria Irene Fornes’ play Mud – arealistic room perched on a dirt pile – challengesconventional interpretations of stage scenery.
(A) appeal……(B) plot (C) mood(D) setting (E) rehearsal
2. Ironically, an affluent society that purchases muchmore food than it actually needs suffers because of that-------, since in conditions of affluence diseases relatedto overeating and poor nutrition seem to -------.
(A) lavishness .. adapt(B) overabundance .. thrive(C) corpulence .. vex(D) practicality .. awaken(E) commonness .. abound
3. Because of the ------- effects of the not springs, touristssuffering from various ailments flocked to the village’sthermal pools.
(A) succulent (B) redolent (C) cerebral(D) mandatory (E) therapeutic
4. More valuable and comprehensive than any previouslyproposed theory of the phenomenon, Salazar’s researchhas ------- the basis for all subsequent ------- in her
field.
(A) undermined .. advancements(B) prepared .. debacles(C) provided .. investigations(D) dissolved .. experiments(E) reinforced .. misconceptions
5. Dangerously high winds ------- attempts to begin thespace shuttle mission on schedule, delaying the launchby nearly a week.
(A) thwarted (B) forfeited (C) implemented(D) discharged (E) redoubled
6. The guest speaker on Oprah Winfrey’s talk showoffended the audience by first ------- them and thenrefusing to moderate these ------- remarks.
(A) flattering .. commendable(B) haranguing .. intemperate(C) praising .. radical(D) enraging .. conciliatory(E) accommodating .. indulgent
7. By the end of the long, arduous hike, Chris waswalking with a ------- gait, limping slowly backto the campsite.
(A) halting (B) robust (C) constant(D) prompt (E) facile
8. Actors in melodramas often emphasized tense momentsby being -------, for example, raising their voices andpretending to swoon.
(A) imperious (B) inscrutable (C) convivial(D) histrionic (E) solicitous
3
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
130
10
Questions 9-12 are based on the following passages.
Passage 1
The intelligence of dolphins is well documented by sci- ence. Studies show that dolphins are able to understand sign language, solve puzzles, and use objects in their environment as tools. Scientist also believe that dolphins possess a sophisticated language: numerous instances have been recorded in which dolphins transmitted information from one individual to another. A recent experiment provedthat dolphins can even recognize themselves in a mirror – something achieved by very few animals. This behavior demonstrates that dolphins are aware of their own indi-viduality, indicating a level of intelligence that may bevery near our own.
Passage 2
Are dolphins unusually intelligent? Dolphins havelarge brains, but we know that brain size alone doesnot determine either the nature or extent of intelligence.Some researchers have suggested that dolphins have bigbrains because they need them – for sonar and soundprocessing and for social interactions. Others have arguedthat regardless of brain size, dolphins have an intelligencelevel somewhere between that of a dog and a chimpanzee.The fact is, we don’t know, and comparisons may not beespecially helpful. Just as human intelligence is appropri-ate for human needs, dolphin intelligence is right for thedolphin’s way of life. Until we know more, all we can sayis that dolphin intelligence is different.
9. In lines 2-8, the author of Passage 1 mentions activitiesthat suggest dolphins
(A) are unusually sensitive to their environment(B) do not generally thrive in captivity(C) have a unique type of intelligence(D) are uncommonly playful animals(E) have skills usually associated with humans
10. The author of Passage 2 would most likely respondto the last sentence of Passage 1 by
(A) suggesting that intelligence in animals is virtuallyimpossible to measure
(B) observing that intelligence does not mean thesame thing for every species
(C) questioning the objectivity of the studies already
conducted(D) noting that dolphin activities do not require a high
level of intelligence(E) arguing that little is actually known about dolphin
social behavior
11. The two passages differ in their views of dolphinintelligence in that Passage 1 states that dolphins
(A) share a sophisticated culture, while Passage 2contends that dolphin intelligence is roughlyequal to human intelligence
(B) are as intelligent as humans, while Passage 2notes that dolphins outperform other animals
(C) are more intelligent than most other animals,while Passage 2 points out that dolphins areless intelligent than other mammals
(D) are highly intelligent, while Passage 2 suggeststhat there is not enough evidence to understanddolphin intelligence fully
(E) have large brains, while Passage 2 argues thatbrain size does not signify intelligence
12. Which generalization about dolphins is supportedby both passages?
(A) They display self-awareness.(B) They are more emotional than other animals.(C) They learn at a rapid rate.(D) They have a certain degree of intelligence.(E) They have shown the ability to use tools.
135
140
145
150
155
Questions 13-24 are based on the following passage.
The following passage appeared in an essay writtenin 1987 in which the author, who is of Native Americandescent, examines the representation of Native Americansduring the course of United States history.
In many respects living Native Americans remain asmysterious, exotic, and unfathomable to their contempo-raries at the end of the twentieth century as they were to thePilgrim settlers over three hundred fifty years ago. Nativerights, motives, customs, languages, and aspirations aremisunderstood by Euro-Americans out of a culpable igno- rance that is both self-serving and self-righteous. Part ofthe problem may well stem from the long-standing ten-dency of Europeans or Euro-American thinkers to regardNative Americans as fundamentally and profoundlydifferent, motivated more often by mysticism than byambition, charged more by unfathomable visions thanby intelligence or introspection.
This idea is certainly not new. Rousseau’s* “noblesavages” wandered, pure of heart, through a pristine world.Since native people were simply assumed to be incompre- hensible, they were seldom comprehended. Their societieswere simply beheld, often through cloudy glasses, andrarely probed by the tools of logic and deductive analysisautomatically reserved for cultures prejudged to be“civilized”. And on those occasions when Europeansdid attempt to formulate an encompassing theory, it wasnot, ordinarily, on a human-being-to-human basis,but rather through an ancestor-descendant model. NativeAmericans, though obviously contemporary with theirobservers, were somehow regarded as ancient, examplesof what Stone Age Europeans must have been like
It’s a great story, an international crowd pleaser, butthere is a difficulty: Native Americans were, and are,Homo sapiens sapiens. Though often equipped with ashovel-shaped incisor tooth, eyes with epicanthic folds,or an extra molar cusp, Native American people have hadto cope, for the last forty thousand years or so, just likeeveryone else. Their cultures have had to make internalsense, their medicines have had to work consistently andpractically, their philosophical explanations have had to bereasonably satisfying and dependable, or else the ancestorsof those now called Native Americans would truly havevanished long ago.
The reluctance in accepting this obvious fact comesfrom the Eurocentric conviction that the West holds amonopoly on science, logic, and clear thinking. Toadmit that other, culturally divergent viewpoints areequally plausible is to cast doubt on the monolithiccenter of Judeo-Christian belief: that there is but oneof everything – God, right way, truth – and Europeansalone knew what that was. If Native American cultures
were acknowledged as viable, then European societies were something less than an exclusive club. It is littlewonder, therefore, that Native Americans were perceivednot so much as they were but as they had to be, from aEuropean viewpoint. They dealt in magic, not method.They were stuck in their past, not guided by its precedents.
Such expedient misconception argues strongly for thedevelopment and dissemination of a more accurate, moreobjective historical account of native peoples – a goaleasier stated than accomplished. Native American societieswere nonliterate before and during much of the early periodof their contact with Europe, making the task of piecingtogether a history particularly demanding. The familiar andreassuring kinds of written documentation found in Europeansocieties of equivalent chronological periods do not exist,and the forms of tribal record preservation available – oralhistory, tales, mnemonic devices, and religious rituals – strike university-trained academics as inexact, unreliable,and suspect. Western historians, culture-bound by theirown approach to knowledge, are apt to declaim that next tonothing, save the evidence of archaeology, can be knownof early Native American life. To them, an absolute voidis more acceptable and rigorous than an educated guess.
However, it is naïve to assume that any culture’s historyis perceived without subjective prejudice. Every modernobserver, whether he or she was schooled in the traditionsof the South Pacific or Zaire, of Hanover, New Hampshire,or Vienna, Austria, was exposed at an early age to one oranother form of folklore about Native Americans. Forsome, the very impressions about Native American tribesthat initially attracted them to the field of American historyare aspects most firmly rooted in popular myth and stereo-type. Serious scholarship about Native American culture andhistory is unique in that it requires an initial, abrupt, andwrenching demythologizing. Most students do not startfrom point zero, but from minus zero, and in the process areoften required to abandon cherished childhood fantasies ofsuperheroes or larger0than-life villains.
* Rousseau was an eighteenth-century French philosopher.
13. The reference to “the Pilgrim settlers” (lines 3-4) is used to
(A) invite reflection about a less complicated era(B) suggest the lasting relevance of religious issues(C) establish a contrast with today’s reformers(D) debunk a myth about early colonial life(E) draw a parallel to a current condition
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
205
210
215
220
225
230
235
240
14. In line 12, “charged” most nearly means
(A) commanded(B) indicated(C) replenished(D) inspired(E) attacked
15. In line 14, the reference to Rousseau is used to emphasize the
(A) philosophical origins of cultural bias(B) longevity of certain types of misconceptions(C) tendency to fear the unknown(D) diversity among European intellectual traditions(E) argument that even great thinkers are fallible
16. The phrase “international crowd pleaser” (line 28)refers to
(A) an anthropological fallacy(B) an entertaining novelty(C) a harmless deception(D) a beneficial error(E) a cultural revolution
17. The “difficulty” referred to in line 29 most directlyundermines
(A) the ancestor-descendant model used by Europeanobservers
(B) the possibility for consensus in anthropologicalinquiry
(C) efforts to rid popular culture of false stereotypes(D) theories based exclusively on logic and deductive
reasoning(E) unfounded beliefs about early European
communities
18. Lines 34-37 (“Their cultures ... dependable”) describe
(A) customs that fuel myths about a society(B) contradictions that conventional logic cannot
resolve(C) characteristics that are essential to the survival of
any people(D) criteria that Western historians traditionally use to
assess cultures(E) preconditions that must be met before a culture
can influence others
19. The two sentences that begin with “They” inlines 52-53 serve to express the
(A) way one group perceived another(B) results of the latest research(C) theories of Native Americans about Europeans(D) external criticisms that some Native Americans
accepted(E) survival techniques adopted by early human societies
20. In lines 66-70, the author portrays Western historians as
(A) oblivious to the value of archaeological research(B) disadvantaged by an overly narrow methodology(C) excessively impressed by prestigious credentials(D) well meaning but apt to do more harm than good(E) anxious to contradict the faulty conclusions of
their predecessors
21. The “educated guess” mentioned in line 70 would mostlikely be based on
(A) compilations of government population statistics(B) sources such as oral histories and religious rituals(C) analyses of ancient building structures by
archaeologists(D) measurements of fossils to determine things such
as physical characteristics(E) studies of artifacts discovered in areas associated
with particular tribes
22. The geographical references in lines 74-75 serve tounderscore the
(A) influence Native American culture has had outsidethe United States
(B) argument that academic training is undergoingincreasing homogenization
(C) universality of certain notions about NativeAmerican peoples
(D) idea that Native Americans have more in commonwith other peoples than is acknowledged
(E) unlikelihood that scholars of Native Americanhistory will settle their differences
23. The passage suggests that "Most students" (line 82)need to undergo a process of
(A) rebelliousness(B) disillusionment(C) hopelessness(D) inertia(E) self-denial
24. In line 83, “minus zero” refers to the
(A) nature of the preconceptions held by mostbeginning scholars of Native American culture
(B) quality of scholarship about Native Americancultures as currently practiced at most universities
(C) reception that progressive scholars of NativeAmerican history have received in academia
(D) shortage of written sources available. to studentsof Native American history
(E) challenges that face those seeking grants to conductoriginal research about Native American history
15
245
250
255
260
265
270
275
280
285
290
295
300
305
310
315
320
325
330
335
340
345
350
355
SECTION 5 CRITICAL READING
Time - 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Soon after the first visitors arrived, increasing numbersof the residents of the remote island thought it possiblethat the outside world, instead of being -------, could beand worth exploring.
(A) insular .. unlimited(B) friendly .. wicked(C) amiable .. cooperative(D) threatening .. fascinating(E) forbidding .. harmful
2. Her dislike of ------- made her regard people whotried to win her approval through praise as -------.
(A) autocrats .. dictators(B) defiance .. toadies(C) tyrants .. connoisseurs(D) adulation .. superiors(E) flattery .. sycophants
3. Some scientists speculate that a small pterosaur of theJurassic period known as Sordes pilosus had ------ .wings that were thin, pliable, and somewhat transparent.
(A) callous (B) arable (C) inflexible(D) membranous (E) viscous
4. To reflect the ------- of that nation’s spoken languages,its writers often make use of a mixture of dialects.
(A) articulation (B) intonation (C) spontaneity(D) profundity (E) heterogeneity
5. She apologized profusely, only to discover that herself-serving excuses failed to have a ----:-- effect.
(A) reprehensible (B) palliative (C) depreciatory(D) litigious (E) compendious
360
365
370
375
380
385
390
395
400
405
410
415
420
Each passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in the passages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
425
20
Questions 6-7 are based on the following passage.
Sometimes the meaning of old phrases is self-evident,as with to move like greased lightning and a close shave.But quite often we are left with language that seems tohave sprung out of the blue and does not appear to signifyanything in particular – even steven, fit as a fiddle, or topaint the town red. Explanations are frequently positedbut are too often unpersuasive. One popular dictionary, forexample, suggests that to be joshing might be connected tothe humorist Josh Billings, but in fact the term was currentas early as 1845. Josh Billings was unknown outside hisneighborhood until 1860.
6. Which of the following phrases would the authorhe most likely to add to the list in lines 5-6 ?
(A) To take a chance(B) To jump for joy(C) To lend an ear(D) To talk through your hat(E) To flare up
7. The last sentence of the passage primarilyserves to
(A) cite a well-known fact(B) invalidate a theory(C) make a veiled accusation(D) note a puzzling incident(E) explain the origins of a phrase
Questions 8-9 are based on the following passage.
The following study is concerned with Western citiesfrom the Middle Ages up to the twentieth century, in terms
of who did what, why, where, and when. It aims to startwith the functions that have drawn people to cities, and towork outward from them to the spaces and buildings thatgrew up to cater to them. Savoring cities in ignorance ordrinking them in visually is not enough; I want to find outnot just who designed the buildings and when they werebuilt but why they were built.
8. Which of the following would most likely be foundat the beginning of this study?
(A) A statistical analysis of crime rates in severalancient Western cities(B) A discussion of the role of central market-places in the early Middle Ages(C) A series of portraits of famous people whohave chosen city life(D) An account of the architectural challengesinvolved in building large cathedrals(E) An essay on ancient archaeological sitesworth visiting today
9. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) criticize a study(B) justify an expense(C) explain an approach(D) depict an era(E) defend a decision
430
435
440
445
Questions 10-18 are based on the following passage.
In this passage, a British novelist and critic recalls afavorite painting.
The first painting I ever bought was by Sheila Fell. Iwent to her studio in Redcliffe Square feeling uncom-.fortable and even embarrassed, thinking how awful to bean artist, having to put up with prospective buyers comingto gape, whereas writers never need to see anyone readtheir books. I kept wishing, all the way up the steep flightsof stairs, that I could go and look without Sheila beingthere. I imagined she must be feeling the same.
I was wrong. Sheila didn’t care who looked at herpaintings or what they thought of them or whether she soldthem. She was perfectly at ease, seemed to me to enjoyshowing her work. There was a confidence about how shepropped up canvas after canvas that made me in turn relax.I don’t know why I’d been so apprehensive – after all,we had Cumberland in common, there was no need for meto explain why I was drawn to her work. What I missed,exiled in London, she missed: the landscape of where wehad both been born and brought up.
The painting was of a haystack in a field. The haystack had clearly just been made. it was golden and the fieldflooded with a red-gold light. the whole atmospheremellow and rich.
It was a large painting and I realized as soon as it arrivedat my home that however much I loved it I had no wall andno room to do it justice. I put it on the largest wall we hadin the biggest room and still I felt I was insulting it – thepower of the picture was too huge to be contained in ourordinary house. And the light was wrong. The paintingcouldn’t glow as it wanted to – it needed a vast, emptyroom and a great distance in front of it. One day, I hoped,I’d take it back to Cumberland and find a house therewhere it could settle happily. But when, after thirty years,we found that house, the painting was failed again. Thewalls were no bigger and neither were the rooms. So I soldthe painting and bought another, smaller Sheila Fell.
It was a terrible mistake. The moment the painting hadbeen taken away I realized how stupid I’d been. So it hadbeen overwhelming, too large, too dramatic to contain ineither house but I shouldn’t have let that matter, I shouldhave found a way to keep it. I grieved for it and wished Icould buy it back, marry it again after the folly of a divorce.But it was too late. And then, in 1990, I went to the SheilaFell Exhibition at the Royal Academy and there, in prideof place, at the end of the longest room, the room it hadalways needed, was my painting. Its beauty was stunning. People stopped and stared and admired and I wanted toshout that what they were looking at was mine. I am notat all possessive by nature but suddenly I felt fiercelypossessive. This glorious painting had been part of my lifefor so very long and I didn’t seem to be able to grasp that Ihad wilfully let it go.
I went back to the exhibition day after day and on thelast one became almost maudlin at saying my good-byes. Idon’t know who owns the painting now – it merely said“Private Collection” in the catalog – but I doubt if I’ll eversee it again. In a way, that’s better than being able to goand look at it hanging in a public gallery – I’d only go ontorturing myself with wanting it back. I can see every detailof it in my mind’s eye anyway. It lives in my head. I canrecite it like a poem, and so in a sense I can never lose it.
10. Which statement best summarizes the description ofthe hypothetical group of people in lines 4-5 compared to that of the actual group in line 46?
(A) The first is uneducated; the second has professionaltraining.
(B) The first slights the artist; the second is overlyrespectful.
(C) The first is somewhat intrusive; the second isapparently appreciative.
(D) The first rejects the artist’s methodology; thesecond praises it.
(E) The first is acquisitive; the second is generousand giving.
11. Line 8 (“I imagined ... the same”) suggests that thenarrator
(A) believes that most artists feel as she does in thepresence of an audience
(B) is as excited about Sheila Fell’s work as she isabout her own
(C) is insecure about promoting her books in frontof prospective buyers
(D) regards Sheila Fell’s attitude as eccentric(E) enjoys the company of artists and writers
12. The central contrast between the first paragraph(lines 1-8) and the second (lines 9-18) is bestdescribed in which terms?
(A) Idealism versus practicality(B) Expectation versus reality(C) Speculation versus investigation(D) Anticipation versus disappointment(E) Generosity versus possessiveness
450
455
460
465
470
475
480
485
490
495
500
505
13. In line 25, the author assumes that “justice” would be
(A) recognizing the unique achievements of an artist(B) ensuring that a work of art reaches the widest
possible audience(C) displaying a work of art to its best advantage(D) enhancing one’s daily life with beautiful art(E) providing elegant surroundings for exceptional
paintings
14. “It was a terrible mistake” (line 36) because thenarrator
(A) had no other souvenirs of Cumberland(B) allowed pragmatic concerns to override her
fondness for the painting(C) did not realize how valuable the painting would
become to collectors(D) felt that she had betrayed Sheila Fell’s trust(E) was unable to appreciate the smaller Sheila Fell
painting
15. In line 41, the metaphor describing “folly” suggeststhat paintings can
(A) lose their aura when seen too often in familiarsurroundings
(B) reinforce misleading recollections of childhoodplaces
(C) arouse strong emotions in their owners(D) provoke artists to make premature decisions(E) bring back painful memories of what they depict
16. The narrator says that for her the painting is “like apoem” (line 60) because it
(A) may be shared with others as a source of pleasure(B) is essential to the narrator’s sense of identity(C) represents the narrator’s longing for beautiful
objects(D) makes a powerful first impression upon the
narrator(E) is preserved vividly within the narrator’s mind
17. In the closing paragraphs, the narrator uses thelanguage of human interaction in describing thepainting in order to emphasize the
(A) empathy she feels with its creator(B) difficulty she encounters in maintaining it(C) pressure she feels to “divorce” it(D) extent to which she feels its loss(E) quality of her nostalgia for what it depicts
18. The passage serves mainly to
(A) discuss the influence of environment on artisticachievement
(B) defend the works of a controversial artist(C) explore the emotional context of a particular
series of events(D) argue against placing undue emphasis on the
economic value of art(E) stimulate interest in an overlooked artistic genre
25
510
515
520
525
530
535
540
545
550
555
560
565
570
575
580
585
590
595
Questions 19-24 are based on the following passage.
The following passage is excerpted from a review of a bookabout aviation's early years.
Aviation belonged to the new century in part becausethe engineering that went into flying machines was utterlydifferent from that of the Industrial Revolution, Nineteenth-century engineering revolved around the steam engine. Itwas about weight and brute power – beautifully machinedheavy steel, burnished bronze, polished copper pipes,ornamental cast iron – everything built, with no expensespared, to withstand great pressures and last any number oflifetimes. Airplane construction was the opposite of all that;it was about lightness.
The Wright brothers, who created one of the firstairplanes, started out making bicycles, which were all therage at the turn of the century. They knew about thin-wallsteel tubes, wire-spoked wheels, chain drives, and whateverelse it took to construct efficient machines that weighed aslittle as possible. In effect, they were practical engineers atthe cheap end of the market, but they happened to befascinated by flight. Says one writer, “Wilbur [Wright]spent his time studying the flight of vultures, eagles,ospreys, and hawks, trying to discover the secret of theirability to maneuver with their wings in unstable air. Tothose who later asked him how he learned to fly, he lovedto reply through his scarcely opened lips: ‘Like a bird.’”
This is the point at which engineering intersects with theimagination, with humanity’s ancient dream of freeingitself from gravity. Until the first fliers got to work, thebody was earthbound, but it enclosed a soul that flew – inmeditation, in poetry, and, as the seventeenth-centuryEnglish poet Andrew Marvell showed, sometimesspectacularly in both:
Casting the body’s vest asideMy soul into the boughs does glide:There, like a Bird, it sits and sings.Then whets and combs its silver wings,And, till prepared for longer flight.Waves in its plumes the various light.
At the beginning of this century, the new lightengineering that allowed people to fly seemed to theuninitiated a kind of poetry. In 1913, a writer in theAtlantic Monthly claimed that “machinery is our new artform” and praised “the engineers whose poetry is too deepto look poetic” and whose gifts “have swung their soulsfree ... like gods.” One of Wright’s most eloquentadmirers called him a poet and compared him to one of“those monks of Asia Minor who live perched on the topsof inaccessible mountain peaks. The soul of Wilbur Wrightis just as high and faraway.” Wright was, in fact, “deeplymiddle-class and unheroic,” writes one biographer, butthose obsessed with the glamour of flight pretended not tonotice.
19. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) profile the unique personalities of aviation pioneers(B) examine the theme of flight in contemporary poetry(C) survey the effects of aviation on twentieth-century
lifestyles(D) explain important principles of flight in nontechnical
language(E) discuss how early aviation captured people’s
imagination
20. In lines 3-9, the description of the steam engine isprimarily intended to illustrate
(A) how train engineers provided a model that aviationengineers could follow
(B) how the Industrial Revolution accelerated society’sinterest in travel
(C) a form of engineering that emphasized immensemass and strength
(D) a twentieth-century preoccupation with style overpracticality
(E) an inefficient mode of transportation whose valuewas overrated
21. The author refers to “the cheap end of the market”(line 17) to make the point that
(A) aviation’s progress was hindered by people whohad little concern for quality
(B) the public could afford to fly because airplanesused inexpensive materials
(C) aviators were the target of unwarranted and pettycriticism
(D) the pioneers of aviation had modest technologicalbeginnings
(E) nineteenth-century engineering methods were tooextravagant
22. In lines 31-36. the author quotes Marvell’s poetryprimarily to illustrate
(A) the contrast between imaginative and practicalengineering
(B) the solution to the mystery of flight(C) how the advantages of flight outweigh its dangers(D) how those who analyze the mechanics of flight
overlook its beauty(E) humanity’s deep longing to be able to fly
600
605
610
615
620
625
630
635
640
645
23. The quotation in lines 41-42 (“the engineers ... poetic”)serves to reinforce the point that
(A) machines can be as inspiring as works of art(B) technology and poetry are both misunderstood(C) scientific practicality is more important than
artistic creativity(D) the technical language of engineers has a lyrical
quality(E) artistic pretensions are not suitable for engineers
24. In lines 47-48, the inclusion of the biographer’sremarks is intended to
(A) criticize an instance of unimaginative thinking(B) demystify the image of an individual(C) reiterate a generally accepted view(D) reassess the importance of an invention(E) perpetuate the legacy of a scientific hero
650
655
660
665
670
675
680
685
690
695
700
705
710
715
720
30
SECTION 7 WRITING
Time - 25 minutes
35 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. Roger had just walked into his office and that waswhen he was told that his plan had finally beenapproved.
(A) and that was when he was told(B) and then he learned(C) when it was learned by him(D) and then they told him(E) when he learned
2. Burdened with three pieces of luggage and a pair of skis, Sarah’s search for a baggage cart was desperate .
(A) Sarah’s search for a baggage cart was desperate(B) Sarah’s desperate search was for a baggage cart(C) a baggage cart was what Sarah desperately
searched for(D) a baggage cart for which Sarah desperately
searched(E) Sarah searched desperately for a baggage cart
3. Karen, James, and Sam were hiking when, stumbling over a rock, he fell down a steep embankment.
(A) when, stumbling over a rock, he fell downa steep embankment
(B) and then he fell down a steep embankment afterhe stumbled over a rock
(C) when Sam fell down a steep embankment afterstumbling over a rock
(D) when Sam fell down a steep embankment, sincehe stumbled over a: rock
(E) and, since Sam has stumbled over a rock,he fell down a steep embankment
4. By attracting new industry when tile old factoryclosed, the council kept the economy of the townfrom collapsing, this was a disaster many workershad feared.
(A) this was a disaster many workers had feared(B) because many workers had feared a disaster(C) the fear many workers had would be a
disaster(D) a disaster that many workers had feared(E) it was feared by many workers as a disaster
5. A healthy economy can be measured not only by thegrowth of businesses but it has a psychologicaleffect on people.
(A) it has a(B) as well in the(C) also by the(D) also the(E) in the way of having a
725
730
735
740
745
750
755
760
765
770
775
780
785
790
6. Today’s political candidates may reach wide audiencesby appearing on television. but old-fashionedbarnstorming still has value because it allows theelectorate to meet candidates face to face.
(A) television, but old-fashioned barnstorming stillhas value because it allows
(B) television, but old-fashioned barnstorming stillwould have value because of allowing
(C) television; however, there is still value inold-fashioned barnstorming by allowing
(D) television, old-fashioned barnstorming still havingvalue because it allows
(E) television, when old-fashioned barnstorming stillhas value in allowing
7. Linguistic research often requires fieldwork where theycan study and record the spoken dialects of a region.
(A) where they(B) through which they(C) and the linguist(D) during which the linguist(E) which they
8. The primatologist has argued that sustained observationof a few animals provides better behavioral datathan does intermittent observation of many animals.
(A) provides better behavioral data than doesintermittent observation of many animals
(B) provides better behavioral data than many animalsare observed intermittently
(C) providing better behavioral data than doesintermittent observation of many animals
(D) do provide better behavioral data than intermittentobservation of many animals do
(E) in contrast to intermittent observation of manyanimals, provides better behavioral data
9. George Orwell’s term “doublespeak” referring to theintentional use of language to confuse or to mislead,as when one says “revenue enhancement” instead of“tax increase.”
(A) referring to the intentional use of language(B) referring to language which is intentionally used(C) which refers to intentionally using language(D) refers to the intentional use of language(E) is when it refers to language used intentionally
10. Scientists predict technological changes in the nextcentury, they will be as dramatic as was the devel-opment of the transcontinental railroad in the lastcentury.
(A) century, they will be as dramatic as was(B) century, these will be as dramatic as(C) century; being as dramatic as was(D) century will be dramatic as is(E) century as dramatic as
11. With billions of tons yet to be mined, some argue thatcoal conservation measures are unnecessary.
(A) With billions of tons(B) Because billions of tons of coal are(C) Because of coal in billions of tons(D) By considering that there are billions of tons(E) Aware of the coal in billions of tons
35
795
800
805
810
815
820
825
830
835
840
845
850
855
860
865
870
875
880
885
The following sentences test your ability to recognizegrammar and usage errors. Each sentence contains eithera single error or no error at all. No sentence contains morethan one error. The error, if there is one, is underlinedand lettered. If the sentence contains an error, select theone underlined part that must be changed to make thesentence correct. If the sentence is correct, select choice E.In choosing answers, follow the requirements of standardwritten English.
EXAMPLE:
The other delegates and him immediately A B Caccepted the resolution drafted by the Dneutral states. No error
E
12. Beatrix Potter completely transformed the
A
traditional animal fable, and they had been
B C
used by other writers simply to illustrate
D
moral lessons. No error
E
13. No matter where they came from or what their
A B
previous lifestyle is, the refugees were grateful for
C D
having been granted political asylum in the United
States. No error
E
14. Susan and Peter were inspired to become
A
a professional writer after hearing a famous journalist
B C
speak about the challenges of investigative reporting.
D
No error
E
15. Cocoa was popular with Europeans before either tea
A
and coffee, its consumption gradually spreading from
B C
Spain and Portugal to Italy, Austria, France.
and then across the channel to the British Isles.
D
No error
E
16. To become a world figure-skating champion like
A
Kristi Yamaguchi, one must be so dedicated that you
B C
will practice six hours a day. No error
D E
17. Each time Caroline turns on her computer, she
has to enter a company code, then her initials, .
A
and then enters a password before she can
B C
begin working . No error
D E
18. A talented and versatile artist, Twyla Tharp
A
has been a dancer, choreographer, and
B C
collaborated on various productions. No error
D E
890
895
900
905
910
915
920
925
930
935
940
945
950
955
19. The scientific writings of Edward O. Wilson,
Stephen Jay Gould, and Richard Dawkins, which
A
has continued the discussion of genetic issues
B
raised by Charles Darwin, are familiar to many
C D
high school and college students. No error
E
20. Conflicts between land developers and conserva-
tionists have repeatedly arose, causing Congress
A B
to reconsider legislation that prohibits building
C
within habitats of endangered species. No error
D E
21. Surely one of the most far-reaching changes in the
A
nineteenth century will be the change from working
B
at home to working in the factory. No error
C D E
22. Howard Gardner, an observer of Chinese elementary
A
education, has questioned the view that requiring
young children to copy models prevents them from
B C
becoming a creative artist later in life. No error
D E
23. The governor’s aides are convinced that
A
the announcement of the investigation,
coming just days before the filing deadline,
B
were calculated to discourage the governor
C
from running for reelection. No error
D E
24. Although the new device was the most clever
A B
designed bird feeder that Ms. Rodriguez had
ever owned, it could not keep squirrels from stealing
C D
the birdseed. No error
E
25. Whatever price the company finally sets for
A
the fuel will probably be determined as much by
B C
politics as by a realistic appraisal of the market.
D
No error
E
960
965
970
975
980
985
990
995
1000
1005
1010
1015
1020
1025
1030
40
26. Air pollution caused by industrial fumes
has been studied for years, but only recently
A B
has the harmful effects of noise pollution
C
become known. No error
D E
27. The historian argued that we ought to learn
A
more about the process by which individuals
B
like Sam Houston were identified by others
C
as leaders. No error
D E
28. Quick to take advantage of Melanie Johnson’s
A B
preoccupation in the history of the Johnson family, the
C
genealogist proposed investigating that history – for
D
a large fee. No error
E
29. Contrasting with most other fifteenth-century rulers,
A B
Portuguese kings could count on the support of the
C
aristocracy in any overseas ventures. No error
D E
Directions: The following passage is an early draft of anessay. Some parts of the passage need to be rewritten.
Read the passage and select the best answers for thequestions that follow. Some questions are about particularsentences or parts of sentences and ask you to improvesentence structure or word choice. Other questions ask youto consider organization and development. In choosinganswers, follow the requirements of standard written English.
Questions 30-35 are based on the following passage.
(1) Many people complain about the negative state-ments made by candidates that are arising during politicalcampaigns. (2) But really, what candidate is ever goingto say something nice about an opponent? (3) Their goal,after all, is if you elect them. (4) Clearly, there are timeswhen negatives must be mentioned. (5) For example, it isonly fair for a challenger to point out that an incumbent hasin fact done a poor job in office. (6) Now that I am almostold enough to vote, I pay more attention to the character ofcandidates.
(7) But there is another kind of negative campaigning,the kind known as “sleaze.” (8) Instead of proposing newpolicies, a sleazy candidate will run a campaign aimed atsmearing the opponent. (9) It has become so common thatit is almost taken for granted.
(10) The dirtiest kinds of campaigns use tactics suchas character assassination and outright lying about anopponent. (11) The actual work of planting the lies isoften done by campaign staff. (12) Then the accusingcandidate denies knowing about it. (13) Meanwhile,someone’s reputation is ruined because people who hearthe lies believe them without checking the facts first.(14) The media report the lies, they say it is because theyare newsworthy. (15) Thus the media contribute to avicious circle.
30. In context, which of the following revisions is necessary in sentence 1 (reproduced below) ?
Many people complain about the negative statementsmade by candidates that are arising during politicalcampaigns.
(A) Delete “people”.(B) Change “complain” to “complained”.(C) Change “are arising” to “is raised”.(D) Delete “that are arising”.(E) Insert “the course of” after “during”.
1035
1040
1045
1050
1055
1060
1065
1070
1075
1080
1085
1090
1095
1100
1105
1110
1115
1120
31. In context, which is the best version of sentence 3 (reproduced below) ?
Their goal, after all, is if you elect them.
(A) (As it is now)(B) Their goal, after all, would be if their opponent
lost.(C) A political candidate’s goal. after all, is when the
election is won.(D) The goal of political candidates, after all, is to win
elections.(E) The goal of politics, after all, is for you to elect
this person.
32. In context, which of the following most logically replaces “It” in sentence 9 (reproduced below) ?
It has become so common that it is almost taken forgranted.
(A) This strategy(B) This lack of planning(C) This complaint(D) This lie(E) This promise
33. What should be done with sentence 6 (reproducedbelow) ?
Now that I am almost old enough to vote. I pay moreattention to the character of candidates.
(A) Leave it as it is.(B) Delete it.(C) Insert “Consequently,” at the beginning.(D) Add “than I formerly did” at the end.(E) Rephrase the sentence and begin with “Shouldn’t
I pay”.
Which is the best way to deal with sentence 14 (reproduced below) ?
The media report the lies, they say it is because theyare newsworthy.
(A) Leave it as it is.(B) Delete it.(C) Change “report” to “verify”.(D) Change “they say it’s because” to “saying that”.(E) Change “they are newsworthy” to “it is news”.
35. Which of the following is best to add after sentence 15 as a concluding sentence?
(A) These tactics may be unnecessary, but they dohave a bright side after all.(B) Restrictions such as this, if rigorously enforced,will control negative campaigning.(C) In conclusion, the media should refuse toparticipate in it.(D) Therefore, as much as political campaigns cost,we deserve better.(E) This practice only worsens the negative aspects of
our political campaigns.
1125
1130
1135
1140
1145
1150
1155
1160
1165
1170
1175
1180
1185
1190
1195
1200
1205
SECTION 8 CRITICAL READING
Time - 20 minutes
19 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. A swindler’s ------- is usually a gullible person who isunable to resist the swindler’s traps.
(A) peer (B) ally (C) prey(D) nemesis (E) superior
2. Improvement~ in refrigeration and transportation in thenineteenth century ------- the ------- of available foodfor many families in the United States.
(A) slowed .. distribution(B) accelerated .. perishability(C) expanded .. variety(D) lowered .. amount(E) created .. dearth
3. Although Eudora Welty and William Faulkner wrotein distinctively different styles, ------- between the twois ------- because they both lived in and wrote aboutMississippi.
(A) comparison .. inevitable(B) cooperation .. destructive(C) discord .. legendary(D) similarity .. unlikely(E) rivalry .. redundant
4. Cito Gaston, one of the least ------- baseball managers,surprised reporters by weeping openly after his teamwon the play-offs.
(A) somber (B) demonstrative (C) insufferable(D) bountiful (E) wistful
5. That critic’s writing is so obscure and dense that uponfirst reading, one finds its ------- hard to penetrate.
(A) brevity (B) rigidity (C) floridity(D) harmony (E) opacity
6. Oil companies seeking permission to drill in Alaskanwildlife refuge areas argued that, for animals. theeffects of previous drilling in comparable areas havebeen -------.
(A) irrepressible (B) counterproductive(C) negligible (D) momentous(E) magnanimous
45
1210
1215
1220
1225
1230
1235
1240
1245
1250
1255
1260
1265
1270
The two passages below are followed by questions based on their content and on the relationship between the two passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in the passages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
1275
Questions 7-19 are based on the following passages.
The narrator of Passage 1 describes the behavior of hisfriend Jerry, with whom he is rooming in an unspecifiedAfrican country. In Passage 2, a different narrator describeshimself while visiting an English couple in London. Bothfictional works were published in the early 1980’s.
Passage 1
Jerry was deceitful, but at the time I did not think hewas imaginative enough to do any damage. And yet hiswas not the conventional double life that most White peopleled in Africa. Jerry had certain ambitions: ambition makesmore liars than egotism does. But Jerry was so careful, hislies such modest calculations, that he was always believed.He said he was from Boston, “Belmont actually,” he toldme. when I said I was from Medford. His passport saidWatertown. He felt he had to conceal it. That explaineda lot: the insecurity of living on the lower slopes of thelong hill. between the smoldering steeples of Boston andthe clean, high-priced air of Belmont. We are probably nomore class-conscious than the British, but when we makeclass an issue. it seems more than snobbery, It becomesa bizarre spectacle, a kind of attention-seeking, and I cannothear an American speaking of his or her social positionwithout thinking of a human fly, one. of those tiny peoplein grubby capes whom one sometimes sees clinging to thebrickwork of a tall building.
What had begun as fantasy had, after six months of hisrepeating it in our insignificant place, made it seem likefact. I had the impression that it was one of the reasons Jerrywanted to stay in Africa. If you tell enough lies about your-self, they take hold. It becomes impossible ever to go back,since that means facing the truth. In Africa, no one coulddispute what Jerry. said he was: a wealthy Bostonian, froma family of some distinction, adventuring in philanthropybefore inheriting his father’s business.
Passage 2
Anna and Chris made me at ease the first day in theirpolished living room-though I was not sure why thesepeople would bother putting themselves out for me at all.And when they kept inviting me back for dinner partiesand extending their hospitality, I wondered if maybe theywere bored, or if their ignorance of American types wassuch that they failed to see that I was not at all of their socialclass: I kept expecting some crude regional expression tobetray me; and, once I thought of it in those terms, I knewI would have to make sure they saw that side of me-todo less would be like trying to “pass.” Yet whatever I saidseemed to make no difference in their acceptance. I then
suspected that my rough-edgedness itself was entertainingto them as a source of vitality, their diversion-of-the-month.This would have made more sense if the Hodgkinsons werebored, dried-up people who needed to feast on any newstranger, but they were not; they were in the world andleading stimulating lives and I finally had to come to the
anxious conclusion that they simply liked me.The truth was I had changed, though I was perhaps
the last to see it. While still feeling myself a child fromthe slums; I had gotten a university education, acquireda taste for esoteric culture; and now, when I thought backto my students in East Harlem, where I felt I should reallybelong, it seemed that I was a stranger there as well. Yet Idid not fit in with people born to middle-class comfort either.It seemed there was no group at all in which I could feel athome. Perhaps anyone with the tiniest sensitivity comes tothat banal conclusion. But what I was seeing now with horror,in the accepting eyes of those a class above me, was thatI had already partly metamorphosed – into them, My onlyhope of growing seemed to point in an upward social direc-tion; but that direction aroused in me a characteristic disap- proval and distaste. I was by no means attracted by everythingI saw in well-off people’s lives, and the momentary need toaccept their hospitality and keep secret my criticism of themmade me feel like a hypocrite.
7. Jerry in Passage 1 and the narrator of Passage 2 aresimilar in that both
(A) feel a strong desire to advance socially(B) feel insecurity about their backgrounds(C) are unsuccessful in deceiving others(D) are determined to remain genuine in the face
of pressure to conform(E) have been unduly influenced by the lifestyles
of their friends
8. Jerry differs most from the narrator of Passage 2 in his
(A) apparent satisfaction with his present circumstances(B) ability to differentiate fantasy from reality(C) willingness to devote his time to philanthropic
concerns(D) refusal to accept the labels and judgments of others(E) eagerness to befriend people of all social and
economic classes
1280
1285
1290
1295
1300
1305
1310
1315
1320
1325
1330
1335
1340
50
9. The first sentence of Passage 1 implies that
(A) the truth can sometimes be more damaging than a lie(B) the narrator failed to recognize Jerry’s deceptive nature(C) the narrator is intolerant of Jerry’s background(D) the narrator’s view of Jerry changed over time(E) Jerry was unaware of his effect on others
10. In line 6, “modest” most nearly means
(A) shy(B) self-conscious(C) secretive(D) decent(E) moderate
11. In the context .of Passage 1, “insignificant” (line 21)suggests that
(A) Jerry’s lying is unlikely to have major consequencesin Africa
(B) Jerry does not realize how commonplace hisbehavior is in Africa
(C) Jerry has lost the ability to distinguish betweenreality and fantasy
(D) the narrator’s .own reputation has been harmedby association with Jerry
(E) the narrator believes Jerry’s behavior is silly
12. Passage 1 indicates that Jerry feels as he does about hislife in Africa because
(A) the inhabitants cannot easily verify his Americansocial status
(B) the inhabitants will not give him the social acceptancethat he craves
(C) he was treated with the same respect as when hewas in America
(D) he is free from the constraints .of family and socialobligations
(E) he is free to befriend people .of varied socialbackgrounds
13. The two passages differ in that, unlike Jerry, thenarrator of Passage 2 has
(A) reluctantly decided to return to the United States(B) found that social advancement is frequently
impossible to .obtain(C) belatedly rediscovered his l.ove for his childhood
home(D) undergone a change in attitude about social class(E) recently stopped lying about his background
14. In lines 36-39 .of Passage 2, the narrator’s perspectivechanges from
(A) suspicion of his hosts to .outright mistrust .of them(B) estrangement to a sense .of camaraderie(C) insecurity to feelings .of despondency(D) apprehensiveness to a desire to reveal himself(E) rejection of his social status to an acceptance of it
15. The statement in lines 44-45 (“to feast ... stranger”)suggests that some hosts
(A) resent being relied on for the latest gossip(B) are anxious about making a good impression
on strangers(C) get immense satisfaction from making their guests
feel inferior(D) pretend to lead m.ore interesting lives than they
actually do(E) live vicariously through their guests
16. In line 45, the phrase “in the world” indicates that theHodgkinsons are
(A) preoccupied with the mundane aspects of life(B) familiar with upper-class social conventions(C) suspicious of spirituality(D) stylish and urbane, but ruthless(E) in contact with interesting people and ideas
17. In line 47, “anxious” most nearly means
(A) meticulous(B) impatient(C) uneasy(D) frightened(E) eager
18. Which best characterizes how the subject of identity istreated in these two passages?
(A) Passage 1 suggests that identity can be self-created,while Passage 2 contends that it is determinedby external and internal factors.
(B) Passage 1 de-emphasizes the importance ofancestral background to one’s identity, whilePassage 2 emphasizes its importance.
(C) Passage 1 argues that the individual chooses his orher identity, while Passage 2 affirms thatidentity is imposed by others.
(D) Both passages downplay the impact of one’sphysical surroundings on one’s identity.
(E) Neither Passage 1 nor Passage 2 considers thepsychological effect of denying parts of one’s
identity.
19. Which generalization about class attitudes is moststrongly supported by both passages?
(A) Charm and personality are more important thanone’s social position.
(B) Only the very wealthy are concerned with socialposition.
(C) It is only after having lived abroad that Americanscome to believe in the possibility of a societywithout class distinctions.
(D) Americans choose to live abroad primarily toescape the confinement of social class.
(E) Even when living abroad, Americans consider
1345
1350
1355
1360
1365
1370
1375
1380
1385
1390
1395
1400
1405
1410
1415
1420
1425
1430
1435
1440
1445
1450
1455
their status in American society crucial to individual identity.
SECTION 10 WRITING
Time -10 minutes
14 Question
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. Some of the Smithsonian Institution’s most prizeditems, from Duke Ellington’s musical transcripts toFirst Ladies’ gowns, coming from unsoliciteddonations.
(A) coming from(B) they come from(C) they have come from(D) came from(E) which came from
2. As patients, the medical directors of the clinic believethat you are entitled to know the reason for the increasein fees.
(A) As patients, the medical directors of the clinicbelieve that you
(B) The belief of the clinic’s medical directors aboutpatients is that you
(C) You, as patients, are believed by the clinicalmedical directors, and you
(D) The medical directors of the clinic, who believethat you, as patients,
(E) The medical directors of the clinic believe thatas patients, you
3. Lecturing at the university, read the poetry of MargaretAtwood was the advice Professor Clark gave heraudience.
(A) read the poetry of Margaret Atwood was theadvice Professor Clark gave her audience
(B) the poetry of Margaret Atwood was whatProfessor Clark advised her audience to read
(C) her audience was advised by Professor Clark toread the poetry of Margaret Atwood
(D) Margaret Atwood’s poetry, advised ProfessorClark, was what her audience should read
(E) Professor Clark advised her audience to read thepoetry of Margaret Atwood
4. Lois has learned more about Arna Bontemps’ writingsthan the rest of us because of being her favorite author.
(A) us because of being her favorite author(B) us; this is the result of Bontemps’ being her
favorite author(C) us because Bontemps is her favorite author(D) us as a result of Bontemps’ being her favorite
author(E) us since Bontemps is her favorite as an author
1460
1465
1470
1475
1480
1485
1490
1495
1500
1505
1510
1515
1520
1525
5. The five autobiographical volumes by Maya Angeloubegin with her childhood in Arkansas and culminate inher adult years in Egypt and Ghana.
(A) begin with her childhood in Arkansas andculminate
(B) that begin with her childhood in Arkansas andculminate
(C) have begun with her childhood in Arkansas andculminating
(D) beginning with her childhood in Arkansas andculminating
(E) are begun with her childhood in Arkansasand culminated
6. Rilke, the great German poet, could not continue hissearch for angelic spirits until he can rely on a strengthgreater than his own.
(A) can rely on a strength greater than his own(B) could rely on a strength greater than his own(C) would be able to rely on a strength greater than
his own(D) can rely on a strength greater than his strength(E) could rely on a strength greater than his strength
7. To ensure that the bread will have the same consistencyfrom batch to batch, it is the quality control specialistwho checks small random samples of dough from eachlot.
(A) it is the quality control specialist who checkssmall random samples of dough from each lot
(B) the quality control specialist checks small randomsamples of dough from each lot
(C) small random samples of dough being checkedfrom each lot by the quality control specialist
(D) the quality control specialist checks samples ofdough – small and randomly – from each lot
(E) the quality control specialist is the one checkingsmall random samples from each lot of dough
8. Surface mining is safer, quicker, and cheaper than deepmining, but the greater is its toll in human misery.
(A) the greater is its toll in human misery(B) it has a greater human misery toll(C) in its human misery toll it is greater(D) there is the greater toll in human misery(E) its toll in human misery is greater
9. Trees are able to collect large amounts of water fromfog – in some areas as much as thirty inches annually.
(A) in some areas as much as thirty inches annually(B) in some areas having thirty inches per year(C) in some places collecting about thirty inches per
year annually(D) collecting the equal of thirty inches annually in
some places(E) which in some areas amounts to thirty inches
collected annually
10. Prized for their rarity, gourmets will spend asmall fortune on wild truffles rather than settlefor common mushrooms.
(A) Prized for their rarity, gourmets will spend a smallfortune on wild truffles rather than settle forcommon mushrooms.
(B) Prized as rare, gourmets will spend a smallfortune on wild truffles as opposed to settling forcommon mushrooms.
(C) Prized for their rarity, wild truffles command asmall fortune among gourmets unwilling tosettle for common mushrooms.
(D) As prized for rarity, wild truffles, being costly,command a small fortune for gourmetsunwilling to settle for common mushrooms.
(E) Wild truffles prized for their rarity by gourmetswho will spend a small fortune but not to settlefor common mushrooms.
11. Evidence from surveys and interviews showfriendships made in high school tend to lastlonger than those made in college.
(A) show friendships made in high school tendto last
(B) show high school friendships that tend to last(C) is showing high school friendships tending
to last(D) shows that friendships made in high school tend
to last(E) shows friendships in high school tends to last
55
1530
1535
1540
1545
1550
1555
1560
1565
1570
1575
1580
1585
1590
1595
1600
1605
1610
1615
1620
1625
1630
12. Growing up in a family where music was a daily partof life, Steve and Rick shared a determination tobecome singing duos known nationwide.
(A) to become singing duos(B) to become a singing duo(C) of becoming singing duos(D) that they would become singing duos(E) of becoming a singing duo
13. Before reading the front page of the newspaper, my sister reads the sports section, my brother reads the comics first.
(A) Before reading the front page of the newspaper,my sister reads the sports section, my brotherreads the comics first.
(B) My sister reads the sports section before readingthe front page of the newspaper and my brother,he reads the comics first.
(C) Before reading the front page of the newspaper,my sister reads the sports section; my brotherreads the comics first.
(D) My brother reads the comics first with my sisterreading the sports section before reading the front page of the newspaper.
(E) Before reading the front page of the newspaper,my sister reads the sports section; my brotherreading the comics first.
14. Jacob Lawrence is best known for his depictions ofmodem urban life, and his celebrated painting Forwardpresents a rural scene from the life of abolitionistHarriet Tubman.
(A) Jacob Lawrence is best known for his depictionsof modem urban life, and
(B) Jacob Lawrence is best known for his depictionsof modem urban life,
(C) Jacob Lawrence is best known for his depictionsof modern urban life, however
(D) Although Jacob Lawrence is best knownfor his depictions of modem urban life,
(E) Inasmuch as Jacob Lawrence is best known forhis depictions of modem urban life,
1635
1640
1645
1650
1655
1660
1665
1670
1675
1680
1685
1690
1695
1700
1705
1710
Practice Test 2
SECTION 1 WRITING – ESSAY
Time – 25 minutes
The essay gives you an opportunity to show how effectively you can develop and express ideas. You should, therefore, takecare to develop your point of view, present your ideas logically and clearly, and use language precisely.
Your essay must be written on the lines provided on your answer sheet – you will receive no other paper on which to write.You will have enough space if you write on every line, avoid wide margins, and keep your handwriting to a reasonable size.Remember that people who are not familiar with your handwriting will read what you write. Try to write or print so that whatyou are writing is legible to those readers.
You have twenty-five minutes to write an essay on the topic assigned below. DO NOT WRITE ON ANOTHER TOPIC.AN OFF-TOPIC ESSAY WILL RECEIVE A SCORE OF ZERO.
Think carefully about the issue presented in the following quotations and the assignment below.
Assignment: Do changes that make our lives easier not necessarily make them better? Plan and write an essay in which youdevelop your point of view on this issue. Support your position with reasoning and examples taken from yourreading, studies, experience, or observations.
Technology promises to make our lives easier, freeing up time for leisure pursuits. But the rapidpace of technological innovation and the split second processing capabilities of computers thatcan work virtually nonstop have made all of us feel rushed. We have adopted the relentless paceof the very machines that were supposed to simplify our lives, with the result that, whether atwork or play, people do not feel like their lives have changed for the better.
Adapted from Karen Finucan, “Life in the Fast Lane”
1715
1720
1725
1730
1735
1740
1745
1750
60
Practice Test 2
SECTION 2 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. To avoid being -------, composer Stephen Sondheimstrives for an element of surprise in his songs.
(A) erratic (B) informal (C) elaborate(D) predictable (E) idiosyncratic
2. Because the pandas had already been weakened bydisease and drought, a harsh winter would have had------- consequences for them.
(A) preventive (B) regressive (C) catastrophic(D) unforeseen (E) moderate
3. For many of the villagers, marriage was a practical -------, one not necessarily ------- of love but neverthelessgrounded largely in economic advantage.
(A) arrangement .. devoid(B) entertainment .. disparaging(C) attitude .. consisting(D) bargain .. worthy(E) misfortune .. trusting
4. Maggie is a procrastinator, naturally inclined to -------and to ------- discussions.(A) meddle .. scoff at(B) temporize .. prolong(C) misbehave .. disrupt(D) sneer .. terminate(E) withdraw .. intrude in
5. Just as glass windows offer buildings both light andinsulation, certain atmospheric gases ------- incomingsunlight and ------- heat radiated from the ground,preventing warmth from escaping.
(A) conduct .. release(B) deflect .. transmit(C) admit .. contain(D) absorb .. dispense(E) resist .. trap
6. The speaker, praised for her style yet ridiculed for hervacuity, often moved naive listeners with ------- aloneand led them to believe that her speech had -------.
(A) reason .. dalliance(B) infelicity .. conviction(C) rhetoric .. substance(D) pragmatism .. futility(E) boorishness .. integrity
7. The actor was noted for his ------- behavior: he quicklybecame irritated if his every whim was not immediatelysatisfied.
(A) fastidious (B) sedulous (C) vindictive(D) petulant (E) mercenary
8. Hayley Mills’s films have been called -------, althoughmost of them are not so sentimental as to deserve thatdescription.
(A) treacly (B) cursory (C) prosaic(D) meticulous (E) consecrated
1755
1760
1765
1770
1775
1780
1785
1790
1795
1800
1805
1810
1815
1820
1825
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
1830
1835
Questions 9-10 are based on the following passage.
That nineteenth-century French novelist Honoréde Balzac could be financially wise in his fiction whilelosing all his money in life was an irony duplicated inother matters. For instance, the very women who hadbeen drawn to him by the penetrating intuition ofthe female heart that he showed in his novels wereappalled to discover how insensitive and awkward thereal man could be. It seems the true source of creationfor Balzac was not sensitivity but imagination. Balzac’sfiction originally sprang from an intuition he first discoveredas a wretched little school boy locked in a darkcloset of his boarding school: life is a prison, and onlyimagination can open its doors. fiancé
9. The example in lines 4-8 primarily suggests that
(A) Balzac’s work was not especially popular among female readers
(B) Balzac could not write convincingly about financial matters
(C) Balzac’s insights into character were not evident in his everyday life
(D) people who knew Balzac personally could not respect him as an artist
(E) readers had unreasonable expectations of Balzac the man
10. The author mentions Balzac’s experience asa schoolboy in order to
(A) explain why Balzac was unable to conducthis financial affairs properly
(B) point out a possible source of Balzac’spowelful imagination
(C) exonerate the boarding school for Balzac’slackluster performance .
(D) foster the impression that Balzac was anunruly student
(E) depict the conditions of boarding schoollife during Balzac’s youth
Questions 11·12 are based on the following passage.
Dr. Jane Wright insisted in later years that herfather, surgeon Louis Wright, never pressured herto study medicine; indeed he warned her how hard
becoming a doctor would be. His very fame, withinand beyond the African American community, madeher training harder in some ways. “His being so goodreally makes it very difficult,” Wright told an inter-viewer soon after she graduated from medical schoolin 1945. “Everyone knows who Papa is.”
11. The passage suggests that Jane Wright’s medicaltraining was made more difficult because
(A) her father warned her not to study medicine(B) her father flaunted his success(C) she did not spend adequate time studying(D) she shared her father’s desire for fame(E) she was inevitably compared to her father
12. The passage is primarily concerned with Jane Wright’s
(A) views of the medical profession(B) childhood recollections(C) perception of her father as a role model(D) reluctance to collaborate with her father(E) gratitude for her father’s encouragement
65
1840
1845
1850
1855
Questions 13-24 are based on the following passages.
The following two passages consider the experiences ofmiddle-class women in nineteenth-century England underthe reign of Queen Victoria (1837-1901). Passage 1 is froma work of social history; Passage 2 is from a study of travelwriting.
Passage 1
In nineteenth-century England, middle-class womenwere usually assigned domestic roles and faced severelylimited ·professional career options. Of course, one canpoint to England’s monarch, Queen Victoria, as a famousexample of a woman at work, and millions of working-class women worked for wages in factories and privatehomes on farms and in stores and markets. But aristocratswere often exempt from societal strictures that bound themiddle class. and working-class women were usuallylooked down on as not being “respectable” for their effortsas workers. As the nineteenth century progressed, it wasassumed that a woman engaged in business was a womanwithout either her own inheritance or a man to support her.Middle-class women already shared with upper-middle-class men the societal stumbling blocks to active pursuitof business, which included the feeling that labor wasdemeaning and not suitable for those with aspirations togentility. But unlike a man, whose self-worth rose throughhis economic exertions, a woman who did likewise riskedopprobrium for herself and possibly shame for those aroundher. Inequality in the working world made it exceedinglydifficult for a middle-class woman to support herself on herown, let alone support dependents. Thus, at a time whenoccupation was becoming a core element in masculineidentity, any position for middle-class women other than inrelation to men was considered anomalous. In the 1851census, the Registrar General introduced a new fifth classof workers, exclusively made up of women:
The fifth class comprises large numbers of the populationthat have no occupation; but it requires no argument toprove that the wife, the mother, the mistress of anEnglish family – fills offices and discharges duties ofno ordinary importance; or that children are or shouldbe occupied in filial or household duties, and in the taskof education, either at home or at school.
This conception of women had been developing over a longperiod. For example, in the late seventeenth century, tradetokens used by local shopkeepers and small masters infamily businesses carried the initials of the man’s and thewoman’s first names and the couple’s surname, but by thelate eighteenth century, only the initials of the male proprietor were retained. This serves to confirm the view ofone Victorian man, born in 1790, that whereas his motherhad confidently joined in the family auctioneering business,the increased division of the sexes had seen the withdrawalof women from business life.
Marriage became, more than ever, the only career optionoffering economic prosperity for women; in business,women appear only as faint shadows behind the scenes.The absence of women in business and financial recordsmakes our knowledge of what middle-class women actuallydid and how they survived economically quite fragmentary.What we do know is that women’s ability to surviveeconomically on their own became increasingly difficult inthe course of the nineteenth century.
Passage 2
In the second half of the nineteenth century in England,under the rule of Queen Victoria, because of the long peaceand the increasing prosperity, more and more women foundthemselves able to travel to Europe unescorted. With theincrease in travel came an increase in the number ofguidebooks, collections of travel hints, and diaries bytravellers – many of which were written by or directed towomen.
Although nineteenth-century women traveled for a varietyof reasons, ranging from a desire to do scientific researchto involvement in missionary work, undoubtedly a majorincentive was the desire to escape from domestic confinementand the social restrictions imposed on the Victorianfemale in Britain. As Dorothy Middleton observes, “Travelwas an individual gesture of the housebound, man-dominated Victorian woman.” The “caged birds” of theVictorian parlor found their wings and often took flight inother lands. In a less constrained environment they achievedphysical and psychological freedom and some measure ofautonomy. In Celebrated Women Travelers of the NineteenthCentury (1883), Davenport Adams comments: “Fettered aswomen are in European countries by restraints, obligations,and responsibilities, which are too often arbitrary andartificial ... it is natural enough that when the opportunityoffers, they should hail even a temporary emancipationthrough travel.”
By the latter part of the nineteenth century, womentravelers began to be singled out as exemplars of the newsocial and political freedom and prowess of women.Ironically, Mary Kingsley and other women travelers wereopposed to or simply uninterested in the late Victoriancampaigns to extend women’s political rights. Thus, whenMary Kingsley returned from West Africa in 1895, she waschagrined to discover that she was being hailed as a “newwoman” because of her travels. Despite her often outspokendistaste for the “new women” agitating for greaterfreedom, the travel books that she and others had writtenstill suggested, as Paul Fussell has argued, “an implicitcelebration of freedom.”
1860
1865
1870
1875
1880
1885
1890
1895
1900
1905
1910
1915
1920
1925
1930
1935
1940
1945
1950
13. Lines 18-21 suggest that for Victorian middle-classwomen, “self-worth” and “economic exertions” werethought to be
(A) mutually exclusive(B) constantly evolving(C) the two keys to success(D) essential to finding a husband(E) easy to achieve
14. In line 24, “occupation” most nearly means
(A) military conquest(B) pleasant diversion(C) vocation(D) settlement(E) political repression
15 . The author of Passage 1 considers trade tokens(lines 37-38) as evidence against the prevalence ofa fifth class in the seventeenth century because they
(A) served as legal currency(B) Were issued to both middle-class and working-
class women(C) helped neutralize gender stereotypes of the day(D) failed to identify women by their names and
positions(E) identified men and women as partners in business
16. All of the following are referred to in Passage 1 asevidence of women’s diminished social status inVictorian England EXCEPT the
(A) disparity between men’s and women’s careeropportunities
(B) shame risked by women who wished to entercommerce
(C) exclusion of women’s initials from trade tokens(D) influence of the queen(E) absence of financial records documenting
women’s activity
17. Which statement about British society, if true,would most directly support the view describedin lines 42-46 ? .
(A) Seventeenth-century women workers could raisetheir status by assuming greater responsibilities.
(B) Women wrote more novels in the early nineteenthcentury than they did in the early eighteenthcentury.
(C) Women and girls worked in factories throughoutthe nineteenth century.
(D) The practice of married couples jointly runningbusinesses died out in the early nineteenthcentury.
(E) In the seventeenth century, formal academicinstitutions were closed to women.
18. In context, “hail” (line 80) most nearly means
(A) call out to(B) gesture to(C) come from(D) welcome(E) summon
19. In Passage 2, Mary Kingsley’s attitude towardwomen’s rights campaigns (lines 85-90) suggests
(A) a single-minded dedication to equality betweenthe sexes
(B) a way in which dedication to one cause can leadto antagonism toward another
(C) a striking inconsistency between her identity asa British citizen and her identity as a woman
(D) an understanding of the link between women’sstruggle for freedom and the struggles of othergroups
(E) a contradiction between her personal motives andthe way her actions are interpreted
20. According to Passage 2, nineteenth-century Britishwomen were motivated to travel by which of thefollowing?
1. Educational pursuitsII. Humanitarian concernsIII. Entrepreneurial interests
(A) I only(B) III only(C) I and II only(D) I and III only(E) II and III only
21. Which British traveler of the Victorian era would bestillustrate the argument made in Passage 2 ?
(A) A middle-class woman who tours Greece andEgypt to examine ancient ruins.
(B) An aristocratic woman who lives in the Asiancapital where her father is the Britishambassador.
(C) A young woman and her husband, bothmissionaries, who relocate permanently in adistant country.
(D) A nursemaid who accompanies an aristocraticfamily to its new home in New York City.
(E) A young girl from a poor family who is sent byrelatives to make her fortune in Australia.
1955
1960
1965
1970
1975
1980
1985
1990
1995
2000
2005
2010
2015
2020
2025
2030
2035
2040
2045
2050
2055
2060
70
22. The “fifth class” (line 29) in Passage 1 is most likewhich group in Passage 2 ?
(A) Women who worked as missionaries(B) The “caged birds” (line 71)(C) The “new woman” (lines 89-90)(D) Dorothy Middleton and Mary Kingsley(E) Davenport Adams and Paul Fussell
23. Passage 1 and Passage 2 share a general tone of
(A) affectionate nostalgia(B) analytical detachment(C) personal regret(D) righteous indignation(E) open hostility
24. The information in Passage 1 supports which assumptionabout the women described in Passage 2 ?
(A) They were discouraged from pursuing careers intheir native country.
(B) They sought to establish new businesses inforeign countries.
(C) They traveled with children and other familymembers.
(D) They were universally admired by British womenfrom every class of society.
(E) They were committed advocates of social reform.
2065
2070
2075
2080
2085
2090
2095
2100
2105
2110
2115
2120
2125
2130
2135
SECTION 5 CRITICAL READING
Time - 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Predictably, detail-oriented workers are ------- keepingtrack of the myriad particulars of a situation.
(A) remiss in (B) adept at(C) humorous about (D) hesitant about(E) contemptuous of
2. The controversial tax fueled a sustained ------that could not be ------- by the Prime Minister’simpassioned speeches.
(A) rebellion .. challenged(B) interrogation .. fortified(C) conflagration .. fostered(D) denial .. restrained(E) uprising .. quelled
3. Inbreeding can promote the expression of ------- genes,those that make an animal subject to disease or impairreproductive efficiency.
(A) ineffable (B) articulated (C) consummate(D) presumptive (E) deleterious
4. The doctor ------- so frequently on disease-preventiontechniques that his colleagues accused him of -------.
(A) vacillated .. inconsistency(B) sermonized .. fidelity(C) wavered .. steadfastness(D) experimented .. inflexibility(E) relied .. negligence
5. A judicious biography must be ------- representationthat depicts both the strengths and the weaknesses ofthe subject, avoiding the two extremes of ------- andindictment.
(A) a polarized .. vindication(B) an imaginative .. discernment(C) a holistic .. censure(D) a complimentary .. animosity(E) an equitable .. eulogy
2140
2145
2150
2155
2160
2165
2170
2175
2180
2185
2190
2195
2200
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
75
2205
Questions 6-9 are based on the following passages.
Passage 1
Farm families are able to achieve efficiency onlythrough a brutal work schedule that few people couldtolerate. “The farm family does physically demandingwork and highly stressful work at least 14 hours a day(often at least 18 hours a day during harvest season),7 days a week, 365 days a year, without a scheduledvacation or weekends off,” wrote Minnesota politicianand farm alumnus Darrell McKigney. “The farmer mustendure all of this without … any of the benefits that mostUnited States labor unions demand.” A dairy farmer, forinstance, cannot just take off for a two-week vacation andnot milk the cows. “Farmers lose perspective on the otherthings in life,” one psychologist has written. “The farmliterally consumes them.”
Passage 2
Americans have distanced themselves from theethics and morals of food production, except where itserves them to think nostalgically about family farmsas the source of our better values. Little wonder thata poll taken by The New York Times finds a majorityof Americans seeing farm life as superior to any otherkind of life in this country. As consumers, Americanshave enjoyed relatively inexpensive food. What willhappen if family farms disappear? What will we dowithout family farmers to watch over the system forus, to be our dupes, and to create that pleasant situationthrough their own great discomfort?
6. Unlike Passage 2, Passage 1 is primarily concernedwith the
(A) ethical implications of food production(B) harsh working conditions on many
farms(C) need for farmers to form a labor union(D) plentiful and varied food available in
the United States(E) beliefs of many Americans regarding
farm life
7. Both passages serve to discourage the
(A) reliance on polls for accurate information(B) desire of many farmers to take annual
vacations(C) tendency of Americans to buy inexpensive
foods(D) romanticization of farm life by nonfarmers(E) rise in price of home-grown produce
8. The author of Passage 1 would most likely assertwhich of the following about the “majority”(line 19, Passage 2) ?
(A) They would be bored by the routine choresthat are performed on a farm.
(B) They have little understanding of the realitiesof farm life.
(C) They admire the efficiency of the averagefamily farm.
(D) They wish to improve the arduous life ofmany farmers.
(E) They are impressed by the current researchon economical food production.
9. Unlike the author of Passage 2, the author of Passage 1does which of the following?
(A) Explains a study.(B) Offers a solution.(C) Argues a position.(D) Discusses a phenomenon.(E) Quotes an authority.
2210
2215
2220
2225
2230
2235
Questions 10·15 are based on the following passage.
This excerpt from a novel by a Chinese American authoris about a Chinese American woman named June. Duringa family dinner party attended by some of June’s ChineseAmerican friends, Waverly, a tax attorney, discusses anadvertisement that June wrote for her.
Waverly laughed in a lighthearted way. “I mean, really,June.” And then she started in a deep television-announcervoice: “Three benefits, three needs; three reasons to buy ...Satisfaction guaranteed . ... ”
She said this in such a funny way that everybodythought it was a good joke and laughed. And then, tomake matters worse, I heard my mother saying to Waverly:“True, one can’t teach style. June is not sophisticated likeyou. She must have been born this way.”
I was surprised at myself, how humiliated I felt. I hadbeen outsmarted by Waverly once again, and now betrayedby my own mother.………………………………………………………………
Five months ago, some time after the dinner, my mothergave me my “life’s importance,” a jade pendant on a goldchain. The pendant was not a piece of jewelry I would havechosen for myself. It was almost the size of my little finger,a mottled green and white color, intricately carved. To me,the whole effect looked wrong: too large, too green, toogarishly ornate. I stuffed the necklace in my lacquer boxand forgot about it.
But these days, I think about my life’s importance.I wonder what it means, because my mother died threemonths ago, six days before my thirty-sixth birthday.And she’s the only person I could have asked to tell meabout life’s importance, to help me understand my grief.
I now wear that pendant every day. I think the carvingsmean something, because shapes and details, which I neverseem to notice until after they’re pointed out to me, alwaysmean something to Chinese people. I know I could askAuntie Lindo, Auntie An-mei, or other Chinese friends,but I also know they would tell me a meaning that is differentfrom what my mother intended. What if they tellme this curving line branching into three oval shapes is apomegranate and that my mother was wishing me fertilityand posterity? What if my mother really meant the carvingswere a branch of pears to give me purity and honesty?
And because I think about this all the time, I alwaysnotice other people wearing these same jade pendants – not the flat rectangular medallions or the round whiteones with holes in the middle but ones like mine, a two-inch oblong of bright apple green. It’s as though we wereall sworn to the same secret covenant, so secret we don’teven know what we belong to. Last weekend, for example,I saw a bartender wearing one. As I fingered mine, I askedhim, “Where’d you get yours?”
“My mother gave it to me,” he said.I asked him why, which is a nosy question that only one
Chinese person can ask another; in a crowd of Caucasians,two Chinese people are already like family.
“She gave it to me after I got divorced. I guess mymother’s telling me I’m still worth something.”
And I knew by the wonder in his voice that he had
no idea what the pendant really meant.
10. In lines 1-4, Waverly characterizes June’sadvertisement as being
(A) unsophisticated and heavy-handed(B) somber and convoluted(C) clear and concise(D) humorous and effective(E) clever and lively
11. In the context of the passage, the statement “I wassurprised at myself” (line 10) suggests that June
(A) had been unaware of the extent of her emotionalvulnerability
(B) was exasperated that she allowed Waverly toembarrass her in public .
(C) was amazed that she could dislike anyone somuch
(D) had not realized that her mother admired herfriend Waverly
(E) felt guilty about how much she resented her ownmother.
12. June’s observation in lines 10-11 (“I had ... again”)suggests that
(A) June had expected Waverly to insult her(B) June had hoped to embarrass Waverly this time(C) Waverly had a private understanding
with June’s mother(D) Waverly had made June feel inadequate
on previous occasions(E) Waverly was a more talented writer than June was
13. For June, a significant aspect of what happened at thedinner party is that
(A) her mother had taken great pains to make Waverlyfeel welcome
(B) her mother had criticized her for arguing with Waverly(C) her mother had sided against her in front of family
and friends(D) Waverly had angered June’s mother(E) Waverly had lied to June’s mother
14. The description of June’s encounter with the bartenderprimarily serves to suggest that
(A) the relationship of mother and son is differentfrom that of mother and daughter
(B) June is not the only one who ponders the meaningof a jade pendant
(C) a jade pendant symbolizes the mystery of life anddeath
(D) June finally understands the true meaning of herjade pendant
(E) strangers are easier to talk to than family membersand friends
15. The passage indicates that the act of giving a jadependant can best be described as
(A) a widely observed tradition(B) a mother’s plea for forgiveness(C) an example of a mother’s extravagance
2240
2245
2250
2255
2260
2265
2270
2275
2280
2285
80
(D) an unprecedented act of generosity(E) an unremarkable event in June’s life
Questions 16-24 are based on the following passage.
This passage is from a book of nature writing published in1991.
In North America, bats fall into mainly predictablecategories: they are nocturnal, eat insects: and are rathersmall. But winging through their lush, green-black world,tropical bats are more numerous and have more exotichabits than do temperate species. Some of them feed onnectar that bat-pollinated trees have evolved to profit fromtheir visits. Carnivorous bats like nothing better than a localfrog, lizard, fish, or bird, which they pluck from the foliageor a moonlit pond. Of course, some bats are vampires anddine on blood. In the movies, vampires are rather showy,theatrical types, but vampire bats rely on stealth and small,pinprick incisions made by razory, triangular front teeth.Sleeping livestock are their usual victims, and they takecare not to wake them. First, they make the classic incisionsshaped like quotation marks; then, with saliva full of anti-coagulants so that the victim’s blood will flow nicely, theyquietly lap their fill. Because this anticoagulant is not toxicto humans, vampire bats may one day play an importantrole in the treatment of heart patients – that is, if we canjust get over our phobia about them. Having studied themintimately, I now know that bats are sweet-tempered, useful,and fascinating creatures. The long-standing fear that manypeople have about bats tells us less about bats than abouthuman fear.
Things that live by night live outside the realm of“normal” time. Chauvinistic about our human need towake by day and sleep by night, we come to associate nightdwellers with people up to no good, people who have thejump on the rest of us and are defying nature, defying theircircadian rhythms.* Also, night is when we dream, and sowe picture the bats moving through a dreamtime, in whichreality is warped. After all, we do not see very well atnight; we do not need to. But that makes us nearly defense-less after dark. Although we are accustomed to masteringour world by day, in the night we become vulnerable asprey. Thinking of bats as masters of the night threatens thesafety we daily take for granted. Though we are at the topof our food chain, if we had to live alone in the rain forest,say, and protect ourselves against roaming predators. wewould live partly in terror, as our ancestors did. Our senseof safety depends on predictability, so anything livingoutside the usual rules we suspect to be an outlaw, a ghoul.
Bats have always figured as frightening or supernaturalcreatures in the mythology, religion, and superstition ofpeoples everywhere. Finnish peasants once believed thattheir souls rose from their bodies while they slept and flewaround the countryside as bats, then returned to them bymorning. Ancient Egyptians prized bat parts as medicinefor a variety of diseases. Perhaps the most mystical, ghoul-ish, and intimate relationship between bats and humansoccurred among the Maya about two thousand years ago.
Zotzilaha Chamalcán, their bat god, had a human body butthe stylized head and wings of a bat. His image appearsoften on their altars, pottery, gold ornaments, and stonepillars. One especially frightening engraving shows the batgod with outstretched wings and a question-mark nose, itstongue wagging with hunger, as it holds a human corpse inone hand and the human’s heart in the other. A number ofother Central American cultures raised the bat to the ulti-mate height: as god of death and the underworld. But itwas Bram Stoker’s riveting novel Dracula that turnedsmall, furry mammals into huge bloodsucking monstersin the minds of English-speaking people. If vampires weresemihuman, then they could fascinate with their connivingcruelty, and thus a spill of horror books began to appearabout the human passions of vampires.
* Circadian rhythms are patterns of daily change within one’s body that are determined by the time of day or night.
16. The author’s main point in the passage is that
(A) there are only a few kinds of bats(B) humans are especially vulnerable to nocturnal
predators(C) bat saliva may have medicinal uses(D) only myth and literature have depicted the true
nature of the bat(E) our perception of bats has its basis in human
psychology .
17. As used in line 14, “classic” most nearly means
(A) literary(B) enduring(C) elegant(D) well-known(E) significant
18. The discussion of vampire bats in the first paragraph(lines 1-24) primarily suggests that
(A) vampire bats are potentially useful creatures(B) movies about vampires are based only on North
American bats(C) most tropical bats are not carnivorous(D) the saliva of vampire bats is more toxic than
commonly supposed(E) scientists know very little about the behavior of
most bats
2290
2295
2300
2305
2310
2315
2320
2325
2330
2335
2340
2345
2350
19. In line 26, the quotation marks around the word“normal” serve to
(A) emphasize the individuality of the author’swriting
(B) criticize the human obsession with time(C) emphasize the limitations of a point of view(D) demonstrate the author’s agreement with the
common use of the word(E) indicate that this word would be stressed if it
were spoken out loud
20. Which of the following assertions detracts LEASTfrom the author’s argument in the second paragraph(lines 25-42) ?
(A) Many people work at night and sleep during theday.
(B) Owls, which hunt at night, do not arouse our fear.(C) Most dangerous predators hunt during the day.(D) Some cultures associate bats with positive
qualities.(E) Some dream imagery has its source in the
dreamer’s personal life.
21. The examples cited in the third paragraph (lines 43-66)are primarily drawn from
(A) anthropology(B) autobiography(C) fiction(D) psychiatry(E) biology
22. The author develops the third paragraph (lines 43-66)by presenting
(A) different sides of a single issue(B) details that culminate in truth(C) a thesis followed by specific illustrations(D) a common argument followed by a refutation of it(E) a common opinion and the reasons it is held
23. The practices of which group mentioned in the lastparagraph best substantiate the claim that bats are“useful” (line 21)?
(A) Finnish peasants(B) Ancient Egyptians(C) Ancient Maya(D) A number of Central American cultures(E) English-speaking people
24. The reference to Stoker’s work in lines 60-66 extendsthe author’s idea that
(A) bats are sweet-tempered creatures(B) our fear of bats reveals more about us than about
bats(C) humans have always been curious about nocturnal
creatures(D) bats can see better than humans at night(E) bats appear as supernatural creatures even in the
folklore of distant nations
85
2355
2360
2365
2370
2375
2380
2385
2390
2395
2400
2405
2410
2415
2420
2425
2430
2435
2440
2445
SECTION 7 WRITING
Time -25 minutes
35 Question
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. In a recent year, more tourists from the United Statesvisited museums in Great Britain than Canada.
(A) Canada(B) Canada did(C) compared to Canada’s(D) Canadian ones(E) in Canada
2. Conners, a publishing and media services company, isacquiring Dispatch Education, it manufactures schooluniforms.
(A) Dispatch Education, it manufactures(B) Dispatch Education, which manufactures(C) Dispatch Education, manufacturing(D) Dispatch Education; it is manufacturing(E) Dispatch Education; for the manufacturing of
3. The campus newspaper does not print as muchworld news as does my hometown.
(A) as does my hometown(B) as does my hometown newspaper(C) compared to what my hometown does(D) like my hometown newspaper does(E) like the one in my hometown does
4. During the labor dispute, barrels of potatoes wereemptied across the highway. and they thereby blockedit to all traffic.
(A) highway, and they thereby blocked it to all traffic(B) highway and therefore blocking it to all traffic(C) highway, by which all traffic was therefore
blocked(D) highway, and therefore this had all traffic blocked(E) highway, thereby blocking all traffic
5. Having thought the problem through with some care,that the committee did not understand her solutionfrustrated the chairperson extremely.
(A) that the committee did not understand her solutionfrustrated the chairperson extremely
(B) the chairperson’s extreme frustration resultedfrom the committee not understanding hersolution
(C) the chairperson’s frustration at the committee’sfailing to understand her solution was extreme
(D) the chairperson was extremely frustrated by thecommittee’s failure to understand her solution
(E) the committee’s failing to understand her solutionwas an extreme frustration to the chairperson
2450
2455
2460
2465
2470
2475
2480
2485
2490
2495
2500
2505
6. The main reasons students give for failing toparticipate in the political process is that they have demanding assignments and work at part-time jobs.
(A) is that they have demanding assignmentsand work at
(B) are demanding assignments and theywork at
(C) are that they have demanding assignmentsand that they work at
(D) is having demanding assignments andhaving to work at
(E) are demanding assignments, in addition toworking at
7. Archaeologists say that the Pueblo village of Acoma,which is 7,500 feet above sea level and 400 feet abovethe valley floor, is the oldest continuously inhabitedspot in the United States.
(A) which is 7,500 feet above sea level and 400 feetabove
(B) located 7,500 feet high above sea level whilehaving measured 400 feet above
(C) with a height 7,500 feet above sea level as well as400 feet above that of
(D) 7,500 feet higher than sea level, and it ascends400 feet above
(E) being 7,500 feet above sea level and 400 feet highmeasured from that of
8. Returning to Dayville after ten years, the small town seemed much livelier to Margo than it had been whenshe was growing up there.
(A) Returning to Dayville after ten years, the smalltown seemed much livelier to Margo
(B) Having returned to Dayville after ten years, itseemed a much livelier town to Margo
(C) After Margo returned to Dayville in ten years,the small town seems much livelier
(D) Margo returned to Dayville after ten years, thesmall town was seemingly much livelier
(E) When Margo returned to Dayville after ten years,the small town seemed much livelier to her
9. Having command of pathos, tragedy, as well as humor,George Eliot is considered to be a great Englishnovelist.
(A) Having command of pathos, tragedy, as well ashumor
(B) Having command of pathos, tragedy, and herhumorous side
(C) By being in command of both pathos and tragedyand also humor
(D) With her command of pathos and tragedy andbeing humorous
(E) Because of her command of pathos, tragedy, andhumor
10. Richard Wright moved many times in his life,moving from the South first he went to the North, then eventually to France from the United States.
(A) moving from the South first he went to theNorth, then eventually to France from theUnited States
(B) the first move he made was from the Southto the North and eventually from theUnited States to France
(C) first from the South to the North andeventually from the United States to France
(D) moving first from the South, he came to theNorth and eventually to France
(E) first from the South he moved to the Northand ended up in France after leaving theUnited States
11. Though heavily dependent on the government forbusiness and information while universities supplythe space research center with talent, as a corporationit remains independent of both.
(A) information while universities supply the spaceresearch center with talent, as a corporation itremains
(B) information and on talent by universities. thespace research center, a corporation
(C) information and on universities for talent, thespace research center is a corporation
(D) information, universities supply the spaceresearch center with talent, but it is a corporation
(E) information. universities supply the spaceresearch center with talent, while it remains acorporation
2510
2515
2520
2525
2530
2535
2540
2545
2550
2555
2560
2565
2570
2575
2580
2585
2590
2595
2600
2605
2610
2615
90
The following sentences test your ability to recognizegrammar and usage errors. Each sentence contains eithera single error or no error at all. No sentence contains morethan one error. The error, if there is one, is underlinedand lettered. If the sentence contains an error, select theone underlined part that must be changed to make thesentence correct. If the sentence is correct, select choice E.In choosing answers, follow the requirements of standardwritten English.
EXAMPLE:
The other delegates and him immediately A B Caccepted the resolution drafted by the Dneutral states. No error
E
12. Fourteen years after the Galileo space probe was
A
launched from the space shuttle Atlantis, the mission
was purposely ended when the Galileo disintegrates
B C
in the dense atmosphere of the planet Jupiter.
D
No error
E
13. The labor union is negotiating a contract with
A
the hospital that will satisfy the demands of
B C
the workers and be acceptable to all levels of
D
management. No error
E
14. Many professional athletes are motivated by either
A
personal pride and love of their sport, but some seem
B C
interested only in money. No error
D E
15. Even though only parts of clay vessels may be
A B
recovered, these pottery shards are invaluable to
C
the archaeologist because it is virtually indestructible.
D
No error
E
16. Along the curve of islands known as the Florida Keys
A
lies a reef of living coral, the only one of a kind in
B C D
the continental United States. No error
E
17. Paule Marshall, whose Barbadian background
A
has influenced her writing, describes many details
B C
of life in the Caribbean Islands vividly in her novels
D
and short stories. No error
E
18. Because he is absent when his rivals voted against
A B
his proposal, Selby is worried about missing future
C D
meetings of the board of directors. No error
E
19. In those cities in which public transportation
A B
is adequate, fewer traffic problems occur and
pedestrians are rarely involved in accidents.
C D
No error
E
2620
2625
2630
2635
2640
2645
2650
2655
2660
2665
2670
2675
2680
2685
2690
20. Social scientists agree that a system for exchanging
A B
goods and services is not only present but also
C
of necessity in all societies. No error
D E
21. The report Alexander is discussing, a report
A
prepared jointly by he and the committee,
B
does not take into account the socioeconomic
C
status of those interviewed. No error
D E
22. It is far easier to ride a bicycle than explaining in
A B
words exactly how a bicycle is ridden. No error
C D E
23. Jorge wanted, for the most part, to travel around
A
the world after graduation, but sometimes he
B
thought about taking a job at his mother’s company
C D
instead. No error
E
24. Since some people are convinced that dowsing,
A B
a method of finding underground water with a
Y -shaped stick, is effective, but others condemn
the procedure as mere superstition. No error
C D E
25. Intense preoccupation on technique appears to be
A B
the one trait that great pianists have in common.
C D
No error
E
26. Apparently impressed with our plans, the foundation
A
awarded Carlos and I a grant to establish a network
B C
of community centers throughout the city; No error
D E
27. Also supported by the commission was the proposed
A B
health clinics and the proposed center to distribute
C
information on job-training opportunities. No error
D E
28. The quality of multivitamin tablets is determined
A
by how long its potency can be protected by
B C ... D
the manufacturer’s coating material. No error
E
29. The research study reveals startling proof of a
A
constant changing seafloor that comprises the
B C
major part of the underwater landscape. No error
D E
2695
2700
2705
2710
2715
2720
2725
2730
2735
2740
2745
2750
2755
2760
2765
2770
2775
Directions: The following passage is an early draft of anessay. Some parts of the passage need to be rewritten.
Read the passage and select the best answers for thequestions that follow. Some questions are about particularsentences or parts of sentences and ask you to improvesentence structure or word choice. Other questions ask youto consider organization and development. In choosinganswers, follow the requirements of standard written English.
Questions 30-35 are based on following passage.
(1) Employers must be aware of their employeesand the variety of situations that arise in the workplace.(2) Employers should become familiar with thedemands a worker faces. (3) But he or she too shouldalso assume responsibility.
(4) Some workplace problems are caused by theemployer’s insufficient attention to the needs of theworkers. (5) One familiar situation is the concernof the boss for the customer’s satisfaction above allelse. (6) Often unreasonable demands are made onan employee to satisfy the customers. (7) This resultsfrom an employer’s lack of consideration for employees.(8) Workers often become resentful of an employerwho is unconcerned about their needs. (9) Sometimesthe employer does not listen fully to suggestions fromemployees this can make workers feel undervalued.
(10) Many times employers must deal with anemployee who ties up the phone for hours or has friendswho continually drop by during working hours. (11) Ifworkers would take more responsibility, then maybe anemployer would be a little more easily tempted topromote them.
(12) There are many problems to be solved in theworkplace. (13) In order to achieve a happy balancebetween boss and employee, the job of a worker shouldbe clearly defined. (14) Employers should listen toworkers’ ideas about improving working conditions.
30. Which of the following, if inserted before sentence 1,would make a good introduction to the essay?
(A) To avoid problems in the workplace, one must firstrecognize the variety of workplaces that exist.
(B) Many employees do not feel free to communicatewith their employers, which can causedifficulties:
(C) Some employers have tried to respect theiremployees.
(D) Communication between an employer andemployees is necessary for maintaining goodworking conditions.
(E) In the future, relations between employers andemployees will be different from what theyare now.
31. In context, which of the following is the best way torevise and combine sentences 2 and 3 (reproducedbelow)?
Employers should become familiar with the demandsa worker faces. But he or she too should also assumeresponsibility.
(A) When employers become familiar with thedemands placed on their workers, they wouldalso assume responsibility.
(B) Employers ought to become familiar with thedemands their workers face, but workers, too,must assume responsibility for their jobs.
(C) Employers who have familiarity with thedemands their workers face also need to takeresponsibility for them.
(D) Those employees whose employers are familiarwith their demands need to take responsibilityfor their jobs.
(E) Employees and employers, familiar with thedemands of the workplace, must also assumeresponsibility for them.
95
2780
2785
2790
2795
2800
2805
2810
2815
2820
2825
2830
2835
2840
2845
2850
2855
2860
2865
32. In context, the underlined portion of sentence 7(reproduced below) could best be revised in whichof the following ways?
This results from an employer’s lack of considerationfor employees.
(A) In contrast is(B) With unreasonable demands, they show(C) This concern illustrates(D) Such a distorted view shows(E) Such treatment demonstrates
33. Which of the following is the best version of theunderlined portion of sentence 9 (reproduced below) ?
Sometimes the employer does not listen fully tosuggestions of employees this can make workers feelundervalued.
(A) (As it is now)(B) When sometimes they do not listen fully to
suggestions from employees, this can make(C) Because the employers had not listened fully to
suggestions from employees, they made(D) An employer who does not listen closely to
suggestions of employees, making(E) Sometimes an employer does not listen closely to
suggestions from employees, making
34. Which of the following sentences, if inserted beforesentence 10, would best improve the third paragraph?
(A) The role of technology in the workplace is alsoimportant.
(B) The success of any business depends on effectivecommunication with customers.
(C) Sometimes employers have legitimate complaintsabout their employees.
(D) It is difficult to tell whether certain problems arecaused by employees or employers.
(E) Employees rarely complain without good reason.
35. Which of the following would make the most logicalfinal sentence for the essay?
(A) Responsibility for removal of safety hazardsfrom the workplace lies with the employer.
(B) For most employers, open communicationwith employees seems somewhat difficult.
(C) The challenge of technology offers newopportunities for opening up communicationin the workplace.
(D) Without clearly assigned duties, workers tendto lose their motivation.
(E) Employers and employees should work togetherto improve conditions in the workplace.
2870
2875
2880
2885
2890
2895
2900
2905
2910
2915
2920
2925
2930
2935
2940
2945
2950
2955
SECTION 8 CRITICAL READING
Time -20 minutes
19 Question
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Though Luis eagerly sought her -------, hesubsequently chose not to heed that advice.
(A) secretiveness (B) cooperation(C) understanding (D) counsel(E) concord
2. As a young physics instructor, Richard Feynmandiscovered that he had the gift of sharing his ------ his subject and making that excitement -------.
(A) passion for .. contagious(B) knowledge of .. inaudible(C) contempt for .. praiseworthy(D) propensity for .. futile(E) commitment to .. impersonal
3. As ------- as the disintegration of the Roman Empiremust have seemed, that disaster nevertheless presentedsome ------- aspects.
(A) momentous .. formidable(B) decisive .. unavoidable{C) unexpected .. ambiguous(D) advantageous .. beneficial(E) catastrophic .. constructive
4. The beauty of Mount McKinley is usually cloaked:clouds ------- the summit nine days out of ten.
(A) release (B) elevate (C) entangle(D) shroud (E) attain
5. Madame C. J. Walker introduced her first hair-careproduct just as demand was reaching its peak; this------- marketing made her a millionaire.
(A) opportune (B) instantaneous(C) intermittent (D) dubious(E) extravagant
6. A scientist should not automatically reject folkwaysthat might at first seem silly or superstitious; scientificqualifications are not a license for -------, nor do they------- prejudice or bias.
(A) experimentation .. eliminate(B) arrogance .. pursue(C) humility .. advocate(D) smugness .. legitimate(E) rigidity .. console
2960
2965
2970
2975
2980
2985
2990
2995
3000
3005
3010
3015
3020
3025
100
The passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or impliedin the passage and in any introductory material that may be provided.
3030
Questions 7-19 are based on the following passage.
Since the advent of television, social commentators havebeen evaluating its role in a modem society. In thefollowing excerpt from an essay published in 1992, aGerman social commentator offers a pointed evaluationof the evaluators.
“Television makes you stupid.”Virtually all current theories of the medium come down
to this simple statement. As a rule, this conclusion is deliv-ered with a melancholy undertone. Four principal theoriescan be distinguished.
The manipulation thesis points to an ideologicaldimension. It sees in television above all an instrumentof political domination. The medium is understood as aneutral vessel, which pours out opinions over a publicthought of as passive. Seduced, unsuspecting viewers arewon over by the wire-pullers, without ever realizing whatis happening to them.
The imitation thesis argues primarily in moral terms.According to it, television consumption leads above allto moral dangers. Anyone who is exposed to the mediumbecomes habituated to libertinism, irresponsibility, crime,and violence. The private consequences are blunted, callous,and obstinate-individuals; the public consequencesare the loss of social virtues and general moral decline.This form of critique draws, as is obvious at first glance, ontraditional, bourgeois sources. The motifs that recur in thisthesis can be identified as far back as the eighteenth centuryin the vain warnings that early cultural criticism soundedagainst the dangers of reading novels.
More recent is the simulation thesis. According to it,the viewer is rendered incapable of distinguishing betweenreality and fiction. The primary reality is rendered unrecog-nizable or replaced by a secondary, phantomlike reality.
All of these converge in the stupefaction thesis.According to it, watching television not only underminesthe viewers’ ability to criticize and differentiate, along withthe moral and political fiber of their being, but also impairstheir overall ability to perceive. Television produces, therefore,a new type of human being, who can, according totaste, be imagined as a zombie or a mutant.
All these theories are rather unconvincing. Their authorsconsider proof to be superfluous. Even the minimal criterionof plausibility does not worry them at all. To mention justone example, no one has yet succeeded in putting beforeus even a single viewer who was incapable of telling thedifference between a family quarrel in the current soapopera and one at his or her family’s breakfast table. Thisdoesn’t seem to bother the advocates of the simulationthesis.
Another common feature of the theories is just as curiousbut has even more serious consequences. Basically, theviewers appear as defenseless victims, the programmersas crafty criminals. This polarity is maintained with greatseriousness: manipulators and manipulated, actors and
imitators, simulants and simulated, stupefiers and stupefiedface one another in a fine symmetry.
The relationship of the theorists themselves to televisionraises some important questions. Either the theorists makeno use of television at all (in which case they do not knowwhat they are talking about) or they subject themselves toit, and then the question arises – through what miracle isthe theorist able to escape the alleged effects of television?Unlike everyone else, the theorist has remained completelyintact morally, can distinguish in a sovereign mannerbetween deception and reality, and enjoys completeimmunity in the face of the idiocy that he or she sorrowfullydiagnoses in the rest of us. Or could – fatal loopholein the dilemma – the theories themselves be symptoms ofa universal stupefaction?
One can hardly say that these theorists have failed tohave any effect. It is true that their influence on what isactually broadcast is severely limited, which may be considereddistressing or noted with gratitude, depending onone’s mood. On the other hand, they have found readylisteners among politicians. That is not surprising, for theconviction that one is dealing with millions of idiots “outthere in the country” is part of the basic psychologicalequipment of the professional politician. One might havesecond thoughts about the theorists’ influence when onewatches how the veterans of televised election campaignsfight each other for every single minute when it comes todisplaying their limousine, their historic appearance beforethe guard of honor, their hairstyle on the platform, andabove all their speech organs. The number of broadcastminutes, the camera angles, and the level of applause areregistered with a touching enthusiasm. The politicians havebeen particularly taken by the good old manipulation thesis.
7. In line 11, the term “wire-pullers” refers to the
(A) bland technicians who staff television studios(B) shadowy molders of public opinion(C) self-serving critics of television(D) hack writers who recycle old concepts(E) slick advertisers of consumer goods
3035
3040
3045
3050
3055
3060
3065
3070
3075
3080
3085
3090
3095
3100
3105
3110
8. As used in line 14, “consumption” most nearly means
(A) destruction(B) viewing(C) erosion(D) purchasing(E) obsession
9. The reference to the eighteenth century in lines 21-24conveys what impression about cultural critiques basedon moral grounds?
(A) They are part of a tradition dating back to earlycivilization.
(B) They were the main preoccupation of that era’ssocial commentators.
(C) They were once persuasive but now go mostlyunheeded.
(D) They are no more valid today than they were inthose years.
(E) They continue to appeal to people having no realunderstanding of art.
10. The author makes the comparison to the novel inlines 21-24 in order to
(A) point out television’s literary origins(B) underscore the general decline of culture(C) emphasize television’s reliance on visual imagery(D) expose narrow-minded resistance to new forms of
expression(E) attack the cultural shortcomings of television
producers
11. The terms “primary” (line 27) and “secondary”(line 28) are used to refer to the distinction between
(A) an ideal democracy and our political system(B) natural objects and human artifacts(C) the everyday world and its fictional counterpart(D) the morality of the elite and that of the populace(E) the world view of scientists and that of mystics
12. Advocates of the simulation thesis might best respondto the criticism in lines 37-44 by pointing out that theauthor
(A) trivializes their theory by applying it too literally(B) concentrates excessively on a relatively
insignificant point(C) is not a psychologist and so cannot properly
evaluate their argument(D) attacks their theory in order· to bolster one of the
other three theories(E) fails to consider the impact of television on
popular culture
13. The author’s attitude toward the evaluators oftelevision can be best described as
(A) intrigued(B) scornful(C) equivocal(D) indulgent(E) nonchalant
14. The author responds to the four theories of televisionprimarily by
(A) offering contrary evidence(B) invoking diverse authorities(C) adding historical perspective(D) blurring the line between the manipulator and the
manipulated(E) implying that no reasonable person could take
them seriously
15. According to the passage, most current evaluations oftelevision are based on which of the followingassumptions about viewers?
I. Viewers are mostly interested in comedyprograms.
II. Viewers never engage their analytical faculties.III. Viewers see political content where there is none.
(A) I only(B) II only(C) I and II only(D) II and III only(E) I, II, and III
16. In mapping out categories of theories about television,the author uses which of the following?
(A) Earnest reevaluation(B) Incredulous analysis of academic documentation(C) Somber warnings about the future(D) Intentional falsification of data(E) Description tinged with irony
17. In line 59, “sovereign” is best understood to mean
(A) excellent(B) opulent(C) elitist(D) absolute(E) oppressive
105
3115
3120
3125
3130
3135
3140
3145
3150
3155
3160
3165
3170
3175
3180
3185
3190
3195
3200
3205
3210
3215
3220
18. The “fatal loophole” (line 62) is best summarized bywhich of the following statements?
(A) Theorists are conspiring with the politicians.(B) Theorists are themselves victims of television.(C) All human beings occasionally behave like
zombies and mutants.(D) Even serious thinkers need mindless entertainment
occasionally.(E) Theorists have disregarded the enjoyment that
television provides.
19. In the last paragraph, the author’s attitude towardpoliticians is primarily one of
(A) humorous contempt(B) outraged embarrassment(C) worried puzzlement(D) relieved resignation(E) begrudging sympathy
3225
3230
3235
3240
3245
3250
3255
3260
3265
3270
3275
3280
3285
3290
3295
SECTION 10 WRITING
Time -10 minutes
14 Question
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. In scenarios reminiscent of the old science fictionmovie Fantastic Voyage, medical researchers hopeexploring the body with miniature robots sent into thebloodstream.
(A) hope exploring(B) hope to explore(C) hope it can explore(D) have hopes to explore(E) are having hopes of exploring
2. H. Ford Douglas, one of the few Black soldiers inWhite regiments during the early part of the Civil War,and eventually to recruit and command his own unit.
(A) and eventually to recruit and command his ownunit
(B) eventually recruited and commanded his own unit(C) he eventually recruited and commanded his own
unit(D) he eventually had his own unit that he recruited
and commanded(E) having eventually recruited and commanded his
own unit
3. Ignorance is not equivalent to stupidity, for ignorancecan often be corrected while stupidity cannot.
(A) for ignorance can often be corrected whilestupidity cannot
(B) since you can often correct ignorance while thesame is not true about stupidity
(C) because it can be corrected and the other cannot(D) because of its correctible nature(E) because the two differ regarding correctibility
4. Journalists should present a balanced view of thenews but with their goal to stir discussion andunsettle complacent thinkers.
(A) with their goal to stir(B) should also stir(C) aiming at the same time to stir(D) also trying to stir(E) its goal should also be in stirring
3300
3305
3310
3315
3320
3325
3330
3335
3340
3345
3350
3355
110
5. The ancient Spartans tested the endurance of potentialwarriors, devised various ordeals, including one thatrequired them to run bare-legged through fields ofstinging nettles.
(A) warriors, devised(B) warriors devising(C) warriors; and devised(D) warriors by devising(E) warriors with the devising of
6. The lawyers representing the parking-lot operatorsasserted as to the defensibility of their practicesas legal and ethical.
(A) as to the defensibility of their practices aslegal and ethical
(B) as to their practices and their defensibilityon legal and ethical grounds
(C) that their practices, that is the operators, are defensible in legal terms as well as ethics
(D) that in regards to defensibility their practicesare legally and ethically defensible
(E) that the practices of the operators are legallyand ethically defensible
7. Toni Morrison was honored by Harvard University notonly as a great novelist but also she wrote eloquentlyof the history of African American culture.
(A) she wrote eloquently of the history(B) having written an eloquent history(C) writing eloquently about the history(D) being an eloquent historian(E) as an eloquent historian
8. Although Central Park in Manhattan is better known than Prospect Park in Brooklyn, the designer of both parks, Frederick Law Olmsted, preferred Prospect Park.
(A) Although Central Park in Manhattan is betterknown than Prospect Park in Brooklyn, thedesigner of both parks, Frederick Law Olmsted,preferred Prospect Park.
(B) Central Park in Manhattan being better knownthan Prospect Park in Brooklyn, the designerof both, Frederick Law Olmsted, preferred thelatter.
(C) Although not as well known as Central Park,Frederick Law Olmsted, he designed bothparks, preferred Prospect Park.
(D) The designer of both Central Park and ProspectPark was Frederick Law Olmsted, he preferredProspect Park.
(E) Although more people know about Manhattan’sCentral Park than Prospect Park in Brooklyn,Frederick Law Olmsted, having designed both,has preferred the latter.
9. Because Uranus is nearly three billion kilometers fromthe Sun and is enveloped by a thick methane cloudlayer, this blocks almost all solar radiation.
(A) layer, this blocks almost all solar radiation(B) layer, this accounts for its receiving almost no
solar radiation(C) layer is the reason why it receives almost no solar
radiation(D) layer, almost no solar radiation reaches the planet(E) layer, it blocks almost all solar radiation from
reaching the planet
3360
3365
3370
3375
3380
3385
3390
3395
3400
3405
3410
3415
3420
3425
3430
3435
3440
3445
3450
10. Lacking good instruction, my mistakes increating a graph to illustrate historical trendswere numerous.
(A) my mistakes in creating a graph to illustratehistorical trends were numerous
(B) I made numerous mistakes in creating agraph to illustrate historical trends
(C) there were numerous mistakes in the graphI created to illustrate historical trends
(D) I created a graph to illustrate historicaltrends with numerous mistakes
(E) the graph I made for illustrating historicaltrends had numerous mistakes
11. It is a myth that mathematicians are so absorbed withabstractions and thus have no practical interests.
(A) so absorbed with abstractions and thus(B) absorbed by abstractions and therefore(C) so absorbed in abstractions that they(D) absorbed in so much abstraction that they(E) too abstract, and so they
12. By simply entering an Internet website or calling a toll-free number, a catalog order can be placed for almostanything from cheesecakes to fully equipped desktopcomputers.
(A) a catalog order can be placed(B) by placing a catalog order(C) they will place your catalog order(D) you can place a catalog order(E) your catalog order can be placed
13. Some people believe that one day we will establish notonly bases on the Moon, but also a landing onNeptunewill occur.
(A) we will establish not only bases on the Moon, butalso a landing on Neptune will occur
(B) not only bases on the Moon will be established,but also a landing on Neptune will be made
(C) we will not only establish bases on the Moon butalso land on Neptune
(D) we will not only establish bases on the Moon, butwe will land on Neptune in addition
(E) we will not only establish bases on the Moon, butwe will land on Neptune
14. The city is populated by many people who, althoughtheir common language is English, the languages athome range from speaking Armenian to Zapotec.
(A) the languages at home range from speakingArmenian to Zapotec
(B) speaking at home is in languages rangingfrom Armenian to Zapotec
(C) the languages range from Armenian to Zapotecat home
(D) speak languages at home that range fromArmenian to Zapotec
(E) they are speaking languages at home rangingfrom Armenian to Zapotec
3455
3460
3465
3470
3475
3480
3485
3490
3495
3500
3505
3510
3515
3520
3525
3530
3535
3540
3545
Practice Test 3
SECTION 1 WRITING – ESSAY
Time – 25 minutes
The essay gives you an opportunity to show how effectively you can develop and express ideas. You should, therefore, takecare to develop your point of view, present your ideas logically and clearly, and use language precisely.
Your essay must be written on the lines provided on your answer sheet – you will receive no other paper on which to write.You will have enough space if you write on every line, avoid wide margins, and keep your handwriting to a reasonable size.Remember that people who are not familiar with your handwriting will read what you write. Try to write or print so that whatyou are writing is legible to those readers.
You have twenty-five minutes to write an essay on the topic assigned below. DO NOT WRITE ON ANOTHER TOPIC.AN OFF-TOPIC ESSAY WILL RECEIVE A SCORE OF ZERO.
Think carefully about the issue presented in the following quotations and the assignment below.
Assignment: Is conscience a more powerful motivator than money, fame, or power? Plan and write an essay in which youdevelop your point of view on this issue. Support your position with reasoning and examples taken from yourreading, studies, experience, or observations.
A mistakenly cynical view of human behavior holds that people are primarily driven by selfishmotives: the desire for wealth, for power, or for fame. Yet history gives us many examples ofindividuals who have sacrificed their own welfare for a cause or a principle that they regarded asmore important than their own lives. Conscience – that powerful inner voice that tells us what isright and what is wrong – can be a more compelling force than money, power, or fame.
115
3550
3555
3560
3565
3570
3575
3580
Practice Test 3
SECTION 3 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. For a long time. most doctors maintained that takingmassive doses of vitamins was relatively harmless;now, however, some are warning that excessivedosages can be -------.
(A) healthy (B) expensive (C) wasteful(D ) toxic (E) inane
2. In Jamaica Kincaid’s novel Lucy, the West Indianheroine ------- her employers’ world, criticallyexamining its assumptions and values.
(A) idealizes (B) avoids (C) beautifies(D) scrutinizes (E) excludes
3. The frequent name changes that the country hasundergone ------ the political turbulence mat hasattended its recent history.
(A) argue against (B) contrast with(C) testify to (D) jeopardize(E) sustain
4. Brachiopods, clamlike bivalves of prehistoric times,were one of the most------- forms of life on the Earth:more than 30,000 species have been ------- from fossilrecords.
(A) plentiful .. subtracted(B) ornate .. retrieved(C) multifarious .. catalogued(D) scarce .. extracted(E) anachronistic .. extrapolated
5. Some interactive computer games are so elaboratelycontrived and require such ------- strategies that onlythe most ------- player can master them.
(A) byzantine .. adroit(B) nefarious .. conscientious(C) devious . . lackadaisical(D) onerous .. slipshod(E) predictable .. compulsive
3585
3590
3595
3600
3605
3610
3615
3620
3625
3630
3635
3640
3645
Each passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in the passage and in any introductory material that may be provided.
120
Questions 6-7 are based on the following passage.
The critic Edmund Wilson was not a self-consciousletter writer or one who tried to sustain studied manner-isms. Nor did he resort to artifice or entangle himself incircumlocutions. The young, middle-aged, and old Wilsonspeaks directly through his letters, which are informal forthe most part and which undisguisedly reflect his changingmoods. On occasion – in response, perhaps, to the miseryof a friend or a public outrage or a personal challenge – hecan become eloquent, even passionate, but that is not hisprevailing tone.
6. Based on the information in the passage,Wilson’s letters can best be described as
(A) cynical(B) spontaneous(C) critical(D) preachy(E) witty
7. The reference to the “young, middle-aged, andold Wilson” (line 4) serves to suggest the
(A) multifaceted nature of Wilson’s literarypersona
(B) maturity Wilson displayed even as a youth(C) effect aging had on Wilson’s temperament(D) longevity of Wilson’s literary career(E) consistency of Wilson’s letter-writing style
Questions 8-9 are based on the following passage.
The belief that it is harmful to the Black community
for authors to explore the humanity of our leaders canhave troubling effects. At the least, it promotes the beliefthat our heroes have to be perfect to be useful. At worst,it censors our full investigation of Black life. If our paint-ings of that life are stock and cramped, their colors draband predictable, the representations of our culture are likelyto be untrue. They will not capture the breadth andcomplexity of Black identity.
8. The passage implies that Black leaders havesometimes been portrayed as being
(A) overly sentimental(B) deeply complex(C) above reproach(D) without regret(E) beyond understanding
9. In context, the “paintings” (lines 15-16) are bestunderstood as a reference to
(A) realistic sculptures(B) historical biographies(C) whimsical novels(D) political cartoons(E) colorful theorems
3650
3655
3660
3665
Questions 10-18 are based on the following passage.
The following passage was written by a physicist in 1986.
When astronomers point their telescopes to the nearestgalaxy, Andromeda, they see it as it was two million yearsago. That’s about the time Australopithecus* was baskingin the African sun. This little bit of time travel is possible because light takes two million years to make the trip fromthere to here. Too bad we couldn’t turn things around andobserve Earth from some cozy planet in Andromeda.
But looking at light from distant objects isn’t real timetravel, the in-the-flesh participation in past and future foundin literature. Ever since I’ve been old enough to read sciencefiction, I’ve dreamed of time traveling. The possibilitiesare staggering. You could take medicine back to fourteenth-century Europe and stop the spread of plague, or you couldtravel to the twenty-third century, where people take theirannual holidays in space stations.
Being a scientist myself, I know that time travel isquite unlikely according to the laws of physics. For onething, there would be a causality violation. If you couldtravel backward in time, you could alter a chain of eventswith the knowledge of how they would have turned out.Cause would no longer always precede effect. For example,you could prevent your parents from ever meeting.Contemplating the consequences of that will give you aheadache, and science fiction writers for decades havedelighted in the paradoxes that can arise from travelingthrough time.
Physicists are, of course, horrified at the thought ofcausality violation. Differential equations for the waythings should behave under a given set of forces andinitial conditions would no longer be valid, since whathappens in one instant would not necessarily determinewhat happens in the next. Physicists do rely on a deterministicuniverse in which to operate, and time travel wouldalmost certainly put them and most other scientistspermanently out of work.
Still, I dream of time travel. There is something verypersonal about time. When the first mechanical clockswere invented, marking off time in crisp, regular intervals,it must have surprised people to discover that timeflowed outside their own mental and physiological processes.Body time flows at its own variable rate, obliviousto the most precise clocks in the laboratory. In fact, thehuman body contains its own exquisite timepieces, all withtheir separate rhythms. There are the alpha waves in thebrain; another clock is the heart. And all the while tick themysterious, ruthless clocks that regulate aging.
Recently, I found my great-grandfather’s favorite pipe.Papa Joe, as he was called, died more than seventy yearsago, long before I was born. There are few surviving photo-graphs or other memorabilia of Papa Joe. But I do have his
pipe, which had been tucked away in a drawer somewherefor years and was in good condition when I found it. I rana pipe cleaner through it, filled it with some tobacco I hadon hand, and settled down to read and smoke. After a cou-ple of minutes, the most wonderful and foreign blend ofsmells began wafting from the pipe. All the different occasionswhen Papa Joe had lit his pipe, all the different placeshe had been that I will never know – all had been lockedup in that pipe and now poured out into the room. I wasvaguely aware that something had got delightfully twistedin time for a moment, skipped upward on the page. Thereis a kind of time travel to be had, if you don’t insist on howit happens.
* An extinct humanlike primate
10. The author mentions Australopithecus in line 3in order to
(A) note an evolutionary progression in the physicalworld(B) dramatize how different Earth was two millionyears ago(C) commend the superior work of astronomers inisolating a moment early in time(D) establish a link between the length of time thatAfrica has been inhabited and the discovery ofthe Andromeda galaxy(E) emphasize the relatively long period of humanlife compared to the age of the universe
11. The statement in lines 6-7 (“Too bad ... Andromeda”)suggests that
(A) scientists would like to observe events thatoccurred on Earth in the distant past(B) there may be planets in Andromeda that arereachable through space travel(C) the study of Andromeda would offer interestingcomparisons to planet Earth(D) a planet in Andromeda will be a likelyobservation point for Earth in the future(E) Andromeda is much older than Earth
12. The author mentions “plague” (line 13) and“space stations” (line 15) primarily to
(A) give an example of the themes of novels abouttime travel(B) suggest contrasting views of the future(C) scoff at the scientific consequences of time travel(D) give examples of the subjects that scientists areinterested in(E) suggest why time travel is such a fascinating topic
3670
3675
3680
3685
3690
3695
3700
3705
3710
3715
3720
3725
3730
13. The author introduces the third paragraph with the words“Being a scientist” in order to
(A) explain an intense personal interest in the topic(B) lend an air of authority to the discussion of time
travel(C) suggest why certain forms of literature are so
appealing(D) provoke those who defend science fiction(E) help illustrate the term “causality violation”
14. In discussing causality violations (lines 16-35), theauthor addresses concerns about all of the followingEXCEPT
(A) anticipatory knowledge of events(B) the belief in a deterministic universe(C) the mechanics of space travel(D) cause-and-effect relationships(E) differential equations based on known forces
15. Which of the following, if true, would undermine thevalidity of me author’s assumption about the impact ofmechanical clocks (“When the first . .. the laboratory”)in lines 37-42 ?
(A) People were oblivious to time on a physical levelbefore clocks were invented.
(B) People have always perceived time as composedof discrete, uniform intervals.
(C) Concern about time was unnecessary until clockswere invented,
(D) Mental and physiological processes are verypredictable.
(E) Body time does not move at a constant rate.
16. The author mentions the brain and the heart(lines 44-45) in order to
(A) demonstrate the rhythmical qualities of timepieces(B) explain the historical significance of mechanical
clocks(C) emphasize how the two organs interact to regulate
internal rhythms(D) illustrate the body’s different internal clocks(E) demystify the precision of organic processes
17. The author uses the word “ruthless” (line 46) tosuggest that
(A) people are bewildered by the prospect of aging(B) the human body has mysterious capacities(C) some people age more rapidly than others do(D) people’s sense of time changes as they age(E) the process of aging is relentless
18. The author mentions that “something …. skippedupward on the page” (lines 60-61) to suggest that
(A) he reread a portion of the page(B) his vision was affected by the smoke(C) he traveled back in time in his imagination(D) his reading reminded him of Papa Joe(E) he believes that reading is the best way to recreate
the past
125
3735
3740
3745
3750
3755
3760
3765
3770
3775
3780
3785
3790
3795
3800
3805
3810
3815
3820
Questions 19·24 are based on the following passage.
The following passage is an excerpt from a book about twentieth-century developments in art. The author refers here to the modern art that emerged shortly after the turn of the century. Many people found this art shocking.
If the new art is not accessible to everyone, whichcertainly seems to be the case, this implies that its impulsesare not of a generically human kind. It is an art not forpeople in general but for a special class who may not bebetter but who are evidently different.
Before we go further, one point must be clarified. Whatis it that the majority of people call aesthetic pleasure?What happens in their minds when they “like” a work ofart; for example, a play? The answer is easy. They like aplay when they become interested in the human destiniesthat are represented, when the love and hatred, the joys andsorrows of the dramatic personages so move them that theyparticipate in it all as though it were happening in real life.And they call a work “good” if it succeeds in creating theillusion necessary to make the imaginary personages appearlike living persons. In poetry the majority of people seekthe passion and pain of the human being behind the poet.Paintings attract them if they find in them figures of men orwomen it would be interesting to meet.
It thus appears that to the majority of people aestheticpleasure means a state of mind that is essentiallyindistinguishable from their ordinary behavior. It differsmerely in accidental qualities, being perhaps less utilitarian,more intense, and free from painful consequences. But theobject toward which their attention and, consequently, alltheir other mental activities are directed is the same as indaily life: people and passions. When forced to considerartistic forms proper-for example, in some surrealistic orabstract art-most people will only tolerate them if they donot interfere with their perception of human forms andfates. As soon as purely aesthetic elements predominateand the story of John and Susie grows elusive, most peoplefeel out of their depth and are at a loss as to what to makeof the scene, the book, or the painting. A work of artvanishes from sight for a beholder who seeks in that workof art nothing but the moving fate of John and Susie orTristan and Isolde.* Unaccustomed to behaving in anymode except the practical one in which feelings are arousedand emotional involvement ensues, most people are unsurehow to respond to a work that does not invite sentimentalintervention.
Now this is a point that has to be made perfectly clear.Neither grieving nor rejoicing at such human destinies asthose presented by a work of art begins to define trueartistic pleasure; indeed, preoccupation with the humancontent of the work is in principle incompatible withaesthetic enjoyment proper.
* Tristan and Isolde were star-crossed lovers in a medieval romance.
19. The passage is primarily concerned with the
(A) lives artists lead as opposed to the ones theyimagine
(B) emotional impact of a painting’s subject matter(C) nature of the pleasure that most people find in a
work of art(D) wide variety of responses that audiences have to
different works of art(E) contrast between the formal elements of the new
art and those of the old
20. As used in line 18, “figures” most nearly means
(A) crude images(B) abstractions(C) representations(D) numbers(E) famous persons
21. It is most likely that “the story of John and Susie”(line 32) refers to
(A) a fictional work that the author will proceed tocritique
(B) a typical narrative of interpersonal relationships(C) an account of an affair in the form of a mystery(D) a legendary couple that has fascinated artists
through the ages(E) a cryptic chronicle of renowned historical
personages
22. The author suggests that the majority of people resistmodem art because they
(A) consider modem artists to be elitist(B) are too influenced by critics to view the art on its
own merits(C) are annoyed by its social message(D) find in it little of human interest to engage them(E) find it too difficult to guess at the artist’s source
of inspiration
3825
3830
3835
3840
3845
3850
3855
3860
3865
23. The author’s attitude toward the majority of people canbest be described as
(A) genuinely puzzled(B) aggressively hostile(C) solemnly respectful(D) generally indifferent(E) condescendingly tolerant
24. The author’s assumption in the final paragraph(lines 42-47) is that
(A) aesthetic pleasure is a response to the purelyartistic elements in a work of art
(B) aesthetic enjoyment of a work of art must focuson the artist’s intentions as much as on theartist’s actual accomplishments
(C) responses to a work of art vary and cannot beeasily defined
(D) the evocation of emotional responses by atraditional work of art depends on the moralconventions of the artist’s society
(E) the majority of people trying to interpret a workof art will concentrate on the artistic technique
3870
3875
3880
3885
3890
3895
3900
3905
3910
3915
3920
3925
3930
130
SECTION 6 WRITING
Time -25 minutes
35 Question
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. The delegates coming this far, they did not want toreturn without accomplishing something.
(A) The delegates coming this far, they(B) Coming this far, the delegates felt they(C) Having come this far, the delegates(D) To come this far, the delegates(E) The delegates came this far, so that they
2. After marching for four hours in temperaturesexceeding ninety degrees, the band members wereas soaked as if marching through a rainstorm.
(A) if marching(B) having marched(C) if from marching(D) if they had marched(E) if they would have marched
3. The harmful effects of smoking on the vascular systemis increasingly well documented.
(A) is increasingly well documented(B) is more and more documented(C) are increasingly well documented(D) are increasing in better documentation(E) has increased in better documentation
4. The issue the council debated, which was whetherrepeal of rent control will improve housing or justincrease profits for landlords.
(A) debated, which was whether repeal of rent controlwill improve
(B) debated was if they would repeal rent controlwould this improve
(C) debated was that repeal of rent control wouldresult in improved
(D) debated was will repealing rent control meanimprovement in
(E) debated was whether repeal of rent control wouldimprove
3935
3940
3945
3950
3955
3960
3965
3970
3975
3980
3985
3990
5. American journalist Harriet Quimby, the first womanto pilot a plane across the English Channel, doing it justnine years after the Wright brothers’ first poweredflight.
(A) Harriet Quimby, the first woman to pilot a planeacross the English Channel, doing it
(B) Harriet Quimby the first woman who piloteda plane across the English Channel, and whodid so
(C) Harriet Quimby became the first woman to havepiloted a plane across the English Channel anddid it
(D) Harriet Quimby became the first woman to pilot aplane across the English Channel, accomplishingthis feat
(E) Harriet Quimby was the first woman piloting aplane across the English Channel, the feat wasaccomplished
6. Naomi and Charles will represent Ammonton High inthe debating contest, their work in this having beenexcellent this year.
(A) contest, their work in this having been excellentthis year
(B) contest; they have done excellent work this yearin this
(C) contest, for this year they have done excellent workin this
(D) contest, for their work as public speakers has beenexcellent this year
(E) contest; their work as public speakers having beenexcellent this year
7. The poem’s colorful images and its verbal wit give thereader pleasure.
(A) give the reader pleasure(B) please the one who is reading(C) gives pleasure to the one who reads it(D) give one pleasure in the reading of it(E) gives one pleasure in reading it
8. Being as she is a gifted storyteller, Linda Goss is anexpert at describing people and places.
(A) Being as she is a gifted storyteller(B) In being a gifted storyteller(C) A gifted storyteller(D) Although she is a gifted storyteller(E) Telling stories giftedly
9. Although the English artist William Blake neverhaving painted portraits, he regarded them as merelymechanical reproductions that, despite their popularity,lacked true creativity.
(A) Although the English artist William Blake neverhaving painted portraits, he regarded them
(B) The English artist William Blake never paintedportraits, he regarded them
(C) Never having painted a portrait, they were regardedby the English artist William Blake
(D) The English artist William Blake never paintedportraits; however, regarding them
(E) The English artist William Blake never paintedportraits because he regarded them
10. The heat was already overwhelming and lasted a week,which duration made it seem sheer torture.
(A) overwhelming and lasted a week, which durationmade it seem
(B) overwhelming, and because of lasting a week,it made it seem
(C) overwhelming and lasted the duration of a weekto make it to seem
(D) overwhelming, and its lasting a week made itseem
(E) overwhelming and, by lasting a week, makingit seem
11. The reason first novels are so often their writers’best work is that it draws upon all the experiencesof childhood.
(A) is that it draws upon(B) is that these first efforts draw upon(C) is because of these first efforts drawing from(D) is because of them drawing upon(E) is their drawing from
3995
4000
4005
4010
4015
4020
4025
4030
4035
4040
4045
4050
4055
4060
4065
4070
4075
4080
4085
4090
4095
4100
The following sentences test your ability to recognizegrammar and usage errors. Each sentence contains eithera single error or no error at all. No sentence contains morethan one error. The error, if there is one, is underlinedand lettered. If the sentence contains an error, select theone underlined part that must be changed to make thesentence correct. If the sentence is correct, select choice E.In choosing answers, follow the requirements of standardwritten English.
EXAMPLE:
The other delegates and him immediately A B Caccepted the resolution drafted by the Dneutral states. No error
E
12. Directed by George Wolfe, the Broadway musical
Bring in ‘Da Noise, Bring in ‘Da Funk telling how
A B
tap dancing evolved from the African American
C
experience in the decades following the Civil War.
D
No error
E
13. The question of whether certain chemical fertilizers
A
are a curse or are they a blessing is still being
B C D
debated. No error
E
14. People which need immediate reeducation for
A
employment are impatient with the prolonged
B C
debate over funding for the new national program.
D
No error
E
15. The thoughtful student wonders what
Patrick Henry meant when he talked about liberty
A B
because most of the members of the House of
C
Burgesses then having been slaveholders. No error
D E
16. One challenge that writer Eleanor Wong Telemaque
faced was how preserving her ethnic identity
A
while becoming more accessible to readers who
B C
are not accustomed to writers from other cultural
D
backgrounds. No error
E
17. No one objects to his company, even though he has
A
made insulting remarks about almost every member
B C
of the group, when he is a remarkably witty man.
D
No error
E
135
4105
4110
4115
4120
4125
4130
4135
4140
4145
4150
4155
4160
4165
4170
4175
18. Just how critical an improved balance of trade is to
A B
a healthy economy has never been more clearer than
C D
it is now. No error
E
19. Critics contend that reforms in welfare
A
has not managed to bring the high percentage
B
of our nation’s children living in poverty the
economic security that they need to thrive.
C D
No error
E
20. Crabs living in polluted waters will come
A
in contact with large numbers of disease-causing
B
microorganisms because it feeds by filtering
C D
nutrients from water. No error
E
21. The new system, which uses remote cameras
A
in the catching of speeding motorists ,
B C
may undermine the police department’s authority.
D
No error
E
22. Although the politician was initially very sensitive to
A
be criticized by the press, he quickly became more
B C
confident about responding to reporters’ sometimes
D
pointed questions. No error
E
23. Although Pre-Raphaelite artists advocated the close
A
study of nature , their paintings sometimes seem
B C
elaborately artificial to modem viewers. No error
D E
24. Lions and tigers may be identical in size, but the
A B
tiger is the fiercer animal and the lion the strongest.
C D
No error
E
25. The decline in science education during the
D
period had two causes: less funding for scientific
A B
research with a decrease in jobs related to space and
C D
defense. No error
E
4180
4185
4190
4195
4200
4205
4210
4215
4220
4225
4230
4235
4240
4245
4250
4255
4260
26. The number of awards given this year to biochemists
A
accentuate the significant gains being made in the
B C D
study of the chemistry of living organisms. No error
E
27. The novel Pride and Prejudice by Jane Austen
was once more widely read and was more popular
A B C
in high schools in the United States
than Charlotte Brontë . No error
D E
28. Until it can be replaced by a faster , more efficient,
A B
and more economical means of transportation, trucks
will carry most of the freight within and through
C D
metropolitan areas. No error
E
29. Nearly all of the editors of the magazine
A
agree that of the two articles to be published ,
B C
Fujimura’s is the more exciting . No error
D E
Directions: The following passage is an early draft of anessay. Some parts of the passage need to be rewritten.
Read the passage and select the best answers for thequestions that follow. Some questions are about particularsentences or parts of sentences and ask you to improvesentence structure or word choice. Other questions ask youto consider organization and development. In choosinganswers, follow the requirements of standard written English.
Questions 30-35 are based on the following passage.
(1) This summer I felt as if I were listening in on theMiddle Ages with a hidden microphone. (2) No, there wereno microphones in those days. (3) But there were letters, andsometimes these letters speak to me like voices from verylong ago.
(4) A book I found contained selected letters from fivegenerations of a family. (5) The Pastons, who lived in aremote part of England over 500 years ago.
(6) Getting anywhere in the Middle Ages was reallyhard, with deep rivers and few bridges and suddensnowstorms coming on in the empty lands betweensettlements. (7) An earl rebelled in London, so that amessenger rode for days to tell the distant head of thePaston family of a feared civil war.
(8) Through the letters a modem reader can sense theiranxieties about rebellious sons and daughters, belligerentneighbors, outbreaks of plague, and shortages of certainfoods and textiles. (9) Unbelievably, there is a 1470 loveletter. (10) The man who wrote it ends “I beg you, let noone see this letter. (11) As soon as you have read it, bum it,for I would not want anyone to see it.” (12) I was sitting onthe front porch with bare feet on the hottest afternoon inJuly and I read that with a shiver. (13) I had been part of acenturies-old secret.
4265
4270
4275
4280
4285
4290
4295
4300
4305
4310
4315
4320
4325
4330
4335
140
30. The best way to describe the relationship of sentence 2to sentence 1 is that sentence 2
(A) anticipates a reader’s possible response tosentence 1
(B) provides historical background for sentence 1(C) repeats the idea presented in sentence 1(D) introduces a contrasting view of sentence 1(E) corrects an inaccuracy stated in sentence I
31. Which of the following sentences would be mostlogical to insert before sentence 4 ?
(A) I first came across these letters while browsing ina library.
(B) No, I am not dreaming; I have been reading them.(C) On the contrary, microphones are a recent
invention.(D) Obviously, a library can open the door to mystery.(E) However, letters are not the oldest form of
communication.
32. In context, which is the best version of the underlinedportions of sentences 4 and 5 (reproduced below) ?
A book I found contained selected letters from fivegenerations of a family. The Pastons, who lived ina remote part of England over 500 years ago.
(A) (as it is now)(B) a family. The Pastons, living(C) a family; it was the Pastons living(D) the Paston family, who lived(E) the family named Paston and living
33. In context, which of the following is the best versionof the underlined portion of sentence 7 (reproducedbelow) ?
An earl rebelled in London, so that a messenger rodefor days to tell the distant head of the Paston familyof a feared civil war.
(A) (As it is now)(B) An earl had rebelled in London, so(C) For example, with a rebelling earl in London(D) While an earl rebels in London,(E) Once, when an earl rebelled in London,
34. In context, which is the best revision to make tosentence 8 (reproduced below) ?
Through the letters a modern reader can sensetheir anxieties about rebellious sons and daughters,belligerent neighbors, outbreaks of plague, andshortages of certain foods and textiles.
(A) Insert “one’s reading of” after “Through”.(B) Change “their” to “the Pastons’ ”.(C) Change “sense” to “record”.(D) Delete some of the examples.(E) Insert “etc.” after “textiles”.
35. All of the following strategies are used by the writerof the passage EXCEPT
(A) background explanation(B) imaginative description(C) rhetorical questions(D) personal narration(E) direct quotation
4340
4345
4350
4355
4360
4365
4370
4375
4380
4385
4390
4395
4400
4405
4410
4415
4420
4425
4430
SECTION 7 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Commerce on the remote island was conductedexclusively by -------, exchanging goods for goods.
(A) credit (B) loan (C) faith(D) patronage (E) barter
2. The existence of environmental contamination is nolonger a point of -------; government, industry, and thepublic agree that it is a serious problem.
(A) concern (B) cooperation (C) urgency(D) relevance (E) dispute
3. In rock climbing, survival depends as much on -------,the ability to perceive without conscious reasoning, ason physical strength.
(A) autonomy (B) incoherence (C) intuition(D) sophistry (E) receptivity
4. Using computer labs to ------- classroom instruction ismost effective when the curriculum ------- lab exercisesand classroom teaching in a coordinated manner.
(A) supplement .. integrates(B) substantiate .. undermines(C) remedy .. compromises(D) disparage .. reinforces(E) foster .. curtails
5. Many ------- of the style of painting exemplified byMarcel Duchamp’s work focused on Duchamp’s NudeDescending a Staircase as the------- of what theydetested about modem art.
(A) critics .. epitome(B) proponents .. realization(C) advocates .. embodiment(D) debunkers .. rejection(E) belittlers .. reversal
6. Colonial American playwright Mercy Otis Warren wasknown for her political -------: her keen judgment andinsight were widely acknowledged.
(A) partisanship(D) irreverence(B) intemperance(E) interest(C) acumen
7. Johnson’s writing is considered ------- and ------because it is filled with obscure references andbaffling digressions.
(A) deceiving .. ingenuous(B) arcane .. abstruse(C) spare .. didactic(D) lucid .. definitive(E) concise .. esoteric
8. Because the congresswoman has been so openhandedwith many of her constituents, it is difficult toreconcile this ------- with her private -------.
(A) selfishness .. inattention(B) insolence .. virtue(C) magnanimity .. pettiness(D) opportunism .. ambition(E) solicitousness .. generosity
4435
4440
4445
4450
4455
4460
4465
4470
4475
4480
4485
4490
4495
4500
4505
4510
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
145
4515
Questions 9-12 are based on the following passages.
Passage 1
What accounts for the inexorable advance of the giantsports utility vehicle (SUV), into our lives? Why do wewant high-clearance trucks with four-wheel drive andfront bumpers as big as battering rams? A large part ofthe answer lies in the fake Western names so many ofthem carry. No one much cares about what those namesdenote (lakes, frontier towns, mountain ranges); whatmatters is their connotations of rugged individualism,mastery over the wilderness, cowboy endurance. Thenames simply magnify the appeal of these vehiclesthat are the Frankensteinian concoctions of our privateanxieties and desires.
Passage 2
When a major manufacturer launched an SUV namedfor an Alaskan mountain, an auto-trade publication dis-cussed the subtleties of its name. It proposed that eventhough most buyers will never venture into territory anyless trampled than the parking lot of the local shoppingmall, the important goal of the marketing hype is to plantthe image in customers’ minds that they can conquerrugged terrain. Perhaps we’re trying to tame a differentkind of wilderness. Indeed, in an age when many whocan afford to do so live in limited-access communitiesin houses guarded by sophisticated surveillance systems,the SUV is the perfect transportation shelter to protect usfrom fears both real and imagined.
9. Passage 1 and Passage 2 both support which of thefollowing generalizations about buyers of SUVs?
(A) They intend to drive them on rough terrain.(B) They wish to live in mountainous regions.(C) They are wealthier than most other car buyers.(D) They are influenced by marketing strategies.
(E) They are insecure about their social status.
10. Which of the following aspects of SUVs is addressed in Passage 1 but not in Passage 2 ?
(A) Their imposing bulk(B) Their escalating cost(C) The psychology of their owners(D) Their environmental impact(E) The significance of their names
11. Which of the following in Passage 1 exemplifies the “subtleties” mentioned in Passage 2, line 15 ?
(A) “inexorable advance” (line1)(B) “battering rams” (line 4)(C) “lakes, frontier towns, mountain ranges” (line 7)(D) “connotations” (line 8)(E) “Frankensteinian concoctions” (line 11)
12. Passage 1 and the article cited in Passage 2 bothindicate that the imagery used to market SUVsis intended to(A) appeal to drivers’ primitive instincts(B) stir yearnings for a simpler way of life(C) engender feelings of power and control(D) evoke the beauty of unspoiled nature(E) create an aura of nonconformity
4520
4525
4530
4535
4540
Questions 13-24 are based on the following passages.
These two passages discuss different aspects of the impactof the First World War (1914-1918) on British people andsociety. Passage 1 is from a book that examines the depi-tion of the war in literature, letters, and newspapers;Passage 2 is from a book that examines the differencesbetween men’s and women’s experiences of war.
Passage 1
Even if the civilian population at home had wanted toknow the realities of the war, they couldn’t have withoutexperiencing them: its conditions were too novel, its indus-trialized ghastliness too unprecedented. The war wouldhave been simply unbelievable. From the very beginning afissure was opening between the army and the civilians.
The causes of civilian incomprehension were numerous.Few soldiers wrote the truth in letters home for fear ofcausing needless uneasiness. If they did ever write thetruth, it was excised by company officers, who censoredall outgoing mail. The press was under rigid censorshipthroughout the war. Only correspondents willing to filewholesome, optimistic copy were permitted to visit France,and even they were seldom allowed near the battlefields ofthe front line. Typical of these reporters was George Adam,Paris correspondent of the Times. His Behind the Scenes atthe Front, published in 1915, exudes cheer, as well as warmcondescension, toward the common British soldier, whomhe depicts as well fed, warm, safe, and happy – better off,indeed, than at home.
Lord Northcliffe, the publisher of the Times, eventuallyassumed full charge of government propaganda. It is no surprise to find Northcliffe’s Times on July 3, 1916, reportingthe first day’s attack during the battle of the Somme* withan airy confidence which could not help but deepen thedivision between those on the spot and those at home. “SirDouglas Haig telephoned last night,” says the Times, “thatthe general situation was favorable.” It soon ascends to therhetoric of heroic romance: “There is a fair field ... andwe have elected to fight out our quarrel with the Germansand to give them as much battle as they want.” No wondercommunication failed between the troops and those whocould credit prose like that as factual testimony.
* The British army had nearly 60,000 casualties, the largest number forany single day in the army’s history.
Passage 2
The First World War is a classic case of the dissonancebetween official, male-centered history and unofficial femalehistory. Not only did the apocalyptic events of this war havevery different meanings for men and women, such eventswere in fact very different for men and women, a pointunderstood almost at once by an involved contemporarylike Vera Brittain. She noted about her relationship with
her soldier fiancé that the war put a “barrier of indescribableexperience between men and women whom they loved.Sometimes (I wrote at the time) I fear that even if he getsthrough, what he has experienced out there may change hisideas and tastes utterly.”
The nature of the barrier thrust between Vera Brittainand her fiancé, however, may have been even more complexthan she herself realized, for the impediment preventing amarriage of their true minds was constituted not only by hisaltered experience but by hers. Specifically, as young menbecame increasingly alienated from their pre-war selves,increasingly immured in the muck and blood of the battlefields,increasingly abandoned by the civilization of whichthey had ostensibly been heirs, women seemed to become,as if by some uncanny swing of history’s pendulum, evermore powerful. As nurses, as munitions workers, as busdrivers, as soldiers in the agricultural “land army," evenas wives and mothers, these formerly subservient “reaturesbegan to loom larger. A visitor to London observed in1918 that “England was a world of women – women inuniforms.”
The wartime poems, stories, and memoirs by womensometimes subtly, sometimes explicitly explore the polit-ical and economic revolution by which the First World Warat least temporarily dispossessed male citizens of theprimacy that had always been their birthright, while perma- nently granting women access to both the votes and theprofessions that they had never before possessed. Similarly,a number of these women writers covertly or overtly cele-brated the release of female desires and powers which thatrevolution made possible, as well as the reunion (or evenreunification) of women which was a consequence of suchliberated energies.
Their enthusiasm, which might otherwise seem likemorbid gloating, was explained by Virginia Woolf, a writerotherwise known for her pacifist sympathies:
How . .. can we explain that amazing outburst inAugust 1914, when the daughters of educated men ...rushed into hospitals ... drove lorries, worked in fieldsand munitions factories, and used all their immensestores of charm ... to persuade young men that to fightwas heroic ... ? So profound was (woman’s) unconsciousloathing for the education of the private house that shewould undertake any task, however menial, exercise anyfascination, however fatal, that enabled her to escape.Thus consciously she desired “our splendid Empire”;unconsciously she desired our splendid war.
4545
4550
4555
4560
4565
4570
4575
4580
4585
4590
4595
4600
4605
4610
4615
4620
4625
150
13. Passage 2 is unlike Passage 1 in that Passage 2
(A) describes war as dehumanizing(B) endorses the official view of the war(C) discusses war in terms of how it affects women(D) tries to identify the root causes of the conflict(E) criticizes the censorship of information about
the war
14. The “fissure” (line 6) was primarily caused by the
(A) civilians’ ignorance about the soldiers’ experience(B) discrepancy between the experiences of men and
of women(C) behavior of the officers who led the battles(D) guilt that civilians felt about sending young men
off to war(E) special privileges granted to war correspondents
15. The footnote about the battle of the Somme addsinformation that
(A) shows how history has been rewritten to glorifythe war
(B) trivializes the dangers faced by most of thesoldiers
(C) emphasizes the inaccuracy of the published reports(D) suggests that the costs of war outweighed its
benefits(E) offers a journalist’s personal reflection on the war
16. In Passage 1, the author suggests that the attitudes of“those at home” (line 26) were strongly influenced by
(A) the government’s inadequate control overpropaganda
(B) the lack of opportunities for soldiers to write home(C) the disparity between men’s and women’s views
of war(D) efforts of pacifists to end the war(E) censored reports from the press
17. In line 33, “credit” most nearly means
(A) award(B) believe(C) enter(D) supply(E) enrich
18. In Passage 2, the author mentions Vera Brittain(line 40) primarily to
(A) support an argument by quoting material writtenat the time of the war
(B) present an example of the kind of powers womengained during the war
(C) describe how a writer manipulated the facts aboutthe war
(D) discuss the wartime literature produced by women(E) dispute recent historians’ views of the war
19. In line 58, the reference to ‘wives and mothers’ mostdirectly implies the author’s assumption that
(A) families prospered more when women becamehead of the household
(B) soldiers were unaware of the fundamental changetaking place in society
(C) women embraced their chance to work outside thehome
(D) women were anxious about fulfilling familyresponsibilities
(E) women in domestic roles had previously exercisedlittle authority
20. In line 64, the ‘revolution’ refers to
(A) women’s literary output during the war(B) women’s pursuit of rights previously unavailable
to them(C) the change that men underwent after experiencing
war(D) the redistribution of power from the upper to the
middle class(E) the growing equalization of men’s and women’s
wages
21. The author of Passage 2 implies that women’senthusiasm “might ... seem like morbid gloating”(lines 74-75) because
(A) women’s progress caused the deterioration ofmen’s status
(B) women achieved recognition as the real peacemakersin the war
(C) women boasted that the war would be lost withoutthem
(D) women celebrated the fact that they did not haveto fight in the war
(E) women were enjoying power while men were inbattle
4630
4635
4640
4645
4650
4655
4660
4665
4670
4675
4680
4685
4690
4695
4700
4705
4710
4715
4720
4725
4730
4735
4740
22. In lines 84-85, the discussion of women’s involvementwith “menial” tasks and “fatal” fascinations primarilyserves to emphasize the
(A) far-reaching consequences of women’s rolesduring wartime
(B) extent to which women felt stifled in their traditionalroles
(C) contrast between how women idealized war andwhat it was really like
(D) desire by women to escape the horrors of war(E) risks that women took to fight in the war
23. What do Behind the Scenes at the Front (lines 16-17)and “wartime poems, stories and memoirs” (line 62)have in common?
(A) Both caused needless uneasiness among civilians.(B) Both deliberately reflected the views of the
government.(C) Both changed the status quo for women in war-
time Britain.(D) Both encouraged writers to take their craft more
seriously.(E) Neither focused on the realities of the battlefield.
24. Which of the following statements about the effect ofthe First World War is supported by both passages?
(A) Officers resented the government’s complacency.(B) Women gained independence in postwar Britain.(C) Soldiers felt isolated from parts of civilian society.(D) Writers failed in their attempts to describe the
atrocities of war.(E) War proved an undesirable way to resolve the
European conflict.
4745
4750
4755
4760
4765
4770
4775
4780
4785
4790
4795
4800
4805
4810
4815
SECTION 9 CRITICAL READING
Time – 20 minutes
19 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. As sea urchins are becoming scarcer, divers are ------ to more dangerous depths to retrieve them, ------- thepotential for diving injuries.
(A) swimming .. lessening(B) descending .. increasing(C) removing .. avoiding(D) returning .. seeing(E) climbing .. creating
2. Anne mentioned John’s habitual boasting about hiswardrobe as an example of his ------- ways.
(A) erratic (B) egotistical (C ) flexible(D) tactful (E) inconspicuous
3. His peers respected him because he was both ------ and -------: steadfast in his beliefs and tactful in hisnegotiations.
(A) resourceful .. courteous(B) tenacious .. manipulative(C) determined .. demonstrative(D) resolute .. diplomatic(E) outspoken .. indiscriminate
4. Considering that many women had little control overtheir own lives in medieval England, Margery Kempe’sfifteenth-century autobiography demonstrates a remark-able degree of -------.
(A) consecration(C) autonomy(E) simplicity(B) rationalism(D) effacement
5. Following the decree banning ------- acts, suspected------- could be forcibly detained without the filingof formal charges.
(A) rebellious .. conformists(B) apolitical .. loyalists(C) seditious .. insurrectionists(D) subversive .. nonpartisans(E) supportive .. opponents
6. By portraying a wide spectrum of characters in hisone-man show, John Leguizamo provides a ------- tothe theater’s tendency to offer a limited range of rolesto Latino actors.
(A) corrective (B) tribute (C) corollary(D) stimulus (E) precursor
155
4820
4825
4830
4835
4840
4845
4850
4855
4860
4865
4870
4875
4880
4885
4890
The passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or impliedin the passage and in any introductory material that may be provided.
4895
Questions 7-19 are based on the following passage.
The following passage, set in the early 1970’s, is from a1992 novel. The principal characters, Virginia and Clayton,are two cellists in a college orchestra.
She’d met lots of crazy musicians, but no one likeClayton. He was as obsessed as the others, but he had aquirky sense of humor, a slow ironic counterpoint to hisown beliefs. And he didn’t look quite like anyone else.He wore his hair parted dangerously near the middle andcombed it in little ripples like Cab Calloway,1 thoughsometimes he let it fly up a bit at the ends in deference tothe campus pressure for Afros. His caramel-colored skindarkened to toffee under fluorescent light but sometimestook on a golden sheen, especially in the vertical shafts ofsunlight that poured into his favorite practice room whereshe’d often peek in on him – an uncanny complexion, as ifthe shades swirled just under the surface.
Virginia’s friends gave her advice on how to get him.“You two can play hot duets together,” they giggled.
As it turned out, she didn’t have to plan a thing. She wasreading one afternoon outside the Fine Arts Building whenthe day suddenly turned cold. If she went back to the dormfor a sweater, she’d be late for orchestra rehearsal. So shestuck it out until a few minutes before rehearsal at four.By that time, her fingers were so stiff she had to run themunder hot water to loosen them up. Then she hurried to thecello room, where all the instruments were lined up likenovitiates;2 she felt a strange reverence every time shestepped across the threshold into its cool serenity. Therethey stood, obedient yet voluptuous in their molded cases.In the dim light their plump forms looked sadly human, asif they were waiting for something better to come along butknew it wouldn’t.
Virginia grabbed her cello and was halfway down thehall when she realized she’d forgotten to leave her booksbehind. She decided against turning back and continued tothe basement, where the five-till-four pandemonium wasbreaking loose. Clayton was stuffing his books into hislocker.
“Hey, Clayton, how’s it going?”As if it were routine, he took her books and wedged
them in next to his. They started toward the orchestra hall.Virginia cast a surreptitious glance upward; five minutesto four or not, Clayton was not rushing. His long, ganglingframe seemed to be held together by molasses; he moveddeliberately, negotiating the crush while humming a trickypassage from Schumann,3 sailing above the mob.
After rehearsal she reminded him that her books were inhis locker.
“I think I’ll go practice,” he said. “Would you like tolisten?”
“I’ll miss dinner,” she replied, and was about to curse
herself for her honesty when he said, “I have cheese andsoup back at the fraternity house, if you don’t mind thewalk.”
The walk was twenty minutes of agonizing bliss, withthe wind off the lake whipping her blue, and Clayton tooinvolved with analyzing the orchestra’s horn section tonotice. When they reached the house, a brick building witha crumbling porch and weeds cracking the front path, shewas nearly frozen through. He heated up a can of soup, andplunked the cheese down in the center of the dinette table.
“It’s not much,” he apologized, but she was thinkingA loaf of bread, a jug of wine, 4 and felt sated before liftingthe first spoonful. The house was rented to Alpha Phi Alpha,one of three Black fraternities on campus. It had a mustytennis-shoes-and-ripe-Iaundry smell. Books and jackets werestrewn everywhere, dishes piled in the sink.
“When did you begin playing?” she asked.“I began late, I’m afraid,” Clayton replied. “Ninth grade.
But I felt at home immediately. With the music, I mean. Theinstrument took a little longer. Everyone said I was too tallto be a cellist.” He grimaced.
Virginia watched him as he talked. He was the samegolden brown as the instrument, and his mustache followedthe lines of the cello’s scroll.
“So what did you do?” she asked.“Whenever my height came up, I would say, ‘Remember
the bumblebee.’ ”“What do bumblebees have to do with cellos?”“The bumblebee, aerodynamically speaking, is too large
for flight. But the bee has never heard of aerodynamics, soit flies in spite of the laws of gravity. I merely wrapped mylegs and arms around the cello and kept playing.”
Music was the only landscape in which he seemed at ease.In that raunchy kitchen, elbows propped on either side ofthe cooling soup, he was fidgety, even a little awkward. Butwhen he sat up behind his instrument, he had the Irresistiblebeauty of someone who had found his place.
1 American jazz musician and bandleader (1907 -1994)2 Persons who have entered a religious order but have not yet taken final vows3 German composer (1810-1856)4 A reference to Edward Fitzgerald’s “A jug of wine, a loaf of bread, and thou,” a line from The Rubaiyat of Omar Khayyam
4900
4905
4910
4915
4920
4925
4930
4935
4940
4945
4950
4955
4960
4965
4970
4975
4980
160
7. The passage is best described as
(A) a social commentary on classical musicians in theearly 1970’ s
(B) a nostalgic depiction of students in collegeorchestras
(C) a story of how one individual inspired many others(D) an introduction to a character through the perspective
of another character(E) an illustration of a strained but enduring
relationship
8. The references to “fluorescent light” (line 9) and“sunlight” (line 11) suggest the
(A) way that Clayton’s demeanor brightened whenVirginia was nearby
(B) contrast between Clayton’s restraint and Virginia’spassion
(C) attentiveness with which Virginia regarded Clayton(D) monotony of Clayton’s everyday routine(E) superficiality of Clayton’s beauty
9. The imagery in lines 12-13 (‘as if .... surface’) conveyswhich of the following about Clayton?
(A) His complicated nature(B) His erratic reactions(C) His unseemly complacency(D) His passionate loyalty(E) His tendency to argue
10. As contrasted with the language in the openingparagraph, the advice offered by Virginia’s friends(lines 14-15) functions primarily to
(A) break the mood of abstracted musing(B) introduce an element of foreboding(C) poke fun at the pretensions of romantic music(D) contradict Virginia’s opinion of Clayton(E) counter Clayton’s offbeat sense of humor
11. As described in lines 22-25, the atmosphere in the celloroom is most nearly one of
(A) creativity(B) emptiness(C) urgency(D) sanctity(E) accomplishment
12. In line 42, ‘crush’ most nearly means
(A) pressure(B) crowd(C) power(D) infatuation(E) critical condition
13. In lines 42-43, the reference to Clayton’s hummingcreates an impression that he is
(A) uncomfortable with making conversation(B) amused by the plight of other musicians(C) unaware of his effect on other people(D) compelled to show off his talent(E) immersed in his private world
14. In the context of the passage, Clayton’s statement inline 46 (“I think ... practice”) emphasizes his
(A) need to make a dramatic first impression(B) willingness to disrupt a fixed routine(C) consuming interest in music(D) distaste for competition(E) insecurity around other musicians
15. In line 52, the phrase “agonizing bliss” suggests thatVirginia’s pleasure is tempered by
(A) Clayton’s cold manner(B) Clayton’s visible uneasiness(C) her physical discomfort(D) her overriding self-consciousness(E) her sense that the happiness would be short-lived
16. In lines 59-61, Virginia’s reaction to the meal mostdirectly suggests that she
(A) was contented enough without the food(B) was amused by Clayton’s attempts at hospitality(C) was suddenly aware of the chaos in the fraternity
kitchen(D) felt guilty about making Clayton uneasy(E) did not find the atmosphere conducive to romance
17. The description in lines 70-72 emphasizes how
(A) strikingly Clayton resembles fatuous musicians(B) awkwardly Clayton behaves in social situations(C) profoundly Clayton is affected by music(D) closely Virginia associates Clayton with his cello(E) strongly Virginia identifies with Clayton’s situation
4985
4990
4995
5000
5005
5010
5015
5020
5025
5030
5035
5040
5045
5050
5055
5060
5065
5070
5075
5080
5085
5090
18. In referring to the bumblebee (lines 77-80), Claytonconveys his
(A) superstitious nature(B) cunning instincts(C) frail pride(D) resolute determination(E) volatile temperament
19. In lines 82-85, the descriptions of Clayton in thekitchen and Clayton behind his instrument presenta contrast between his
(A) chaos and organization(B) mediocrity and excellence(C) pretension and genuineness(D) laziness and dedication(E) clumsiness and gracefulness
5095
5100
5105
5110
5115
5120
5125
5130
5135
5140
5145
5150
5155
5160
5165
SECTION 10 WRITING
Time – 10 minutes
14 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. At Versailles after the First World War, the Alliesbelieved they had drafted a treaty that would haveensured permanent peace.
(A) would have ensured permanent peace(B) would ensure permanent peace(C) had ensured permanent peace(D) will ensure permanent peace(E) ensures permanent peace
2. The new bird sanctuary, consisting of one hundredacres of unspoiled tideland, and is protected by thestate.
(A) sanctuary, consisting of one hundred acres ofunspoiled tideland, and is protected by the state
(B) sanctuary is protected by the state, it consists ofone hundred acres of unspoiled tideland
(C) sanctuary, consisting of one hundred acres ofunspoiled tideland, is protected by the state
(D) sanctuary is protected by the state consisting ofone hundred acres of unspoiled tideland
(E) sanctuary to consist of one hundred acres ofunspoiled tideland and to be protected by thestate
3. Most people know about calories and nutrition, butthey do not use this knowledge to lose weightpermanently and keep it off.
(A) permanently and keep it off(B) permanent and have it stay off(C) and have it be off permanently(D) and make it permanent(E) and keep it off permanently
4. No sooner had Andrea del Sarto traveled to France towork for the French king but his wife persuaded him toreturn to Italy.
(A) but his wife persuaded him to return(B) but his wife had him persuaded into returning(C) than he was persuaded by his wife that he will
return(D) but he was persuaded by his wife into returning(E) than his wife persuaded him to return
165
5170
5175
5180
5185
5190
5195
5200
5205
5210
5215
5220
5225
5230
5. During the 1980’s and early 1990’s, one reasonhighways in the United States became safer than ever,the use of seat belts increased to about 67 percentnationwide.
(A) ever, the use of seat belts increased to about67 percent nationwide
(B) ever, nationwide, the use of seat belts increasedto about 67 percent
(C) ever, there was a nationwide increase in seat beltuse to 67 percent
(D) ever since they increased seat belt use to67 percent nationwide
(E) ever was that the use of seat belts nationwideincreased to about 67 percent
6. Chaplin will not be remembered for espousing radicalcauses any more than they will remember Wayne forendorsing conservative political candidates.
(A) any more than they will remember Wayne(B) as will Wayne not be remembered(C) any more than Wayne will be remembered(D) just as they will not remember Wayne(E) no more than Wayne will be remembered
7. Civil rights leader and author W. E. B. Du Bois wasinterested in drama because he believed that if yourepresented historical events on stage it could have agreater, more lasting effect than any exhibit or lecture.
(A) if you represented historical events on stage it(B) with the events of history represented on stage they(C) events which were represented historically
on stage(D) by representing historical events on stage(E) representing historical events on stage
8. Many colleges are adopting work-study programs.which offer practical advantages to both the studentsand the institutions.
(A) programs, which offer practical advantages toboth the students and
(B) programs, which offers practical advantages toboth the students and
(C) programs, which offer both practical advantagesto the students plus
(D) programs; it offers practical advantages to boththe students as well as
(E) programs; this offers practical advantages both tothe students and
9. One of the first people to recognize the talent ofLangston Hughes, Jessie Fauset. was an editorat Crisis magazine, publishing Hughes’s poetryin 1921.
(A) Jessie Fauset, was an editor at Crisis magazine,publishing
(B) Jessie Fauset who edited Crisis magazineand published
(C) Jessie Fauset edited Crisis magazine whopublished
(D) Jessie Fauset, an editor at Crisis magazine,published
(E) the editor, Jessie Fauset, published at Crisismagazine
10. Until being widely hunted for its ivory and blubber inthe eighteenth century, walruses were plentiful in thewaters of the northeastern United States.
(A) Until being widely hunted for its(B) Before having been widely hunted for its(C) Up to them being widely hunted for their(D) Until they were widely hunted for their(E) Before they have been widely hunted for their
11. Jesse passed the California bar examination last year,and he has been practicing law in California ever since.
(A) and he has been practicing law in Californiaever since
(B) since that time he has practiced law there(C) where ever since he practices law(D) he has been practicing law in California since then(E) and since then is practicing law there
12. Persuading even the queasiest of readers to spendhours learning about an extravagant variety ofinvertebrates, the effect of Richard Conniff’s Spineless Wonders is to render the repulsive beautiful .
(A) the effect of Richard Conniff’s Spineless Wondersis to render the repulsive beautiful
(B) Richard Conniff renders the repulsive beautiful inSpineless Wonders
(C) the effect of Spineless Wonders, by RichardConniff, is to render the repulsive beautiful
(D) Richard Conniff has had the effect of renderingthe repulsive beautiful in Spineless Wonders
(E) Spineless Wonders, by Richard Conniff, has effectin rendering the repulsive beautiful
5235
5240
5245
5250
5255
5260
5265
5270
5275
5280
5285
5290
5295
5300
5305
5310
5315
5320
5325
5330
5335
5340
13. Most drivers know not only that excessive speeding onhighways wastes gasoline, but also that it is dangerous.
(A) know not only that excessive speeding onhighways wastes
(B) know that excessive speeding on highways couldbe wasteful of
(C) are knowledgeable that excessive speeding onhighways not only wastes
(D) have known that excessive speeding on highwayswastes not only
(E) know that excessive speeding on highways notonly by itself can waste
14. Walt Disney’s first success was his third Mickey Mousefilm, in which Disney produced a cartoon with sound,and Mickey was made to talk.
(A) sound, and Mickey was made to talk(B) sound and making Mickey talk(C) sound, with the result being Mickey talking(D) sound in where Mickey talks(E) sound and made Mickey talk
5345
5350
5355
5360
5365
5370
5375
5380
5385
5390
5395
5400
5405
5410
170
Practice Test 4
SECTION 1 WRITING – ESSAY
Time – 25 minutes
The essay gives you an opportunity to show how effectively you can develop and express ideas. You should, therefore, takecare to develop your point of view, present your ideas logically and clearly, and use language precisely.
Your essay must be written on the lines provided on your answer sheet – you will receive no other paper on which to write.You will have enough space if you write on every line, avoid wide margins, and keep your handwriting to a reasonable size.Remember that people who are not familiar with your handwriting will read what you write. Try to write or print so that whatyou are writing is legible to those readers.
Important Reminders:
A pencil is required for the essay. An essay written in ink will receive a score of zero. Do not write your essay in your test book. You will receive credit only for what you write on your
answer sheet. An off-topic essay will receive a score of zero. If your essay does not reflect your original and individual work, your test scores may be cancelled.
You have twenty-five minutes to write an essay on the topic assigned below.
Think carefully about the issue presented in the following excerpt and the assignment below.
Given the importance of human creativity, one would think it should have a high priority amongour concerns. But if we look at the reality, we see a different picture. Basic scientific research is minimized in favor of immediate practical applications. The arts are increasingly seen as dispensable luxuries. Yet as competition heats up around the globe, exactly the opposite strategy is needed.
Adapted from Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi, Creativity: Flow and the Psychology of Discovery and Invention
Assignment: Is creativity needed more than ever in the world today? Plan and write an essay in which you develop your
point of view on this issue. Support your position with reasoning and examples taken from your reading, studies, experience, or observations..
5415
5420
5425
5430
5435
5440
5445
5450
Practice Test 4
SECTION 3 WRITING
Time -25 minutes
35 Question
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. The poet Claude McKay was a native of Jamaica whospent most of his life in the United States but writingsome of his poems in the Jamaican dialect.
(A) The poet Claude McKay was a native of Jamaicawho spent most of his life in the United Statesbut writing
(B) Being that he was a Jamaican who spentmost of his life in the United States, thepoet Claude McKay writing
(C) Although a native of Jamaica, the poet ClaudeMcKay spent most of his life in the UnitedStates, he wrote
(D) Although the poet Claude McKay spentmost of his life in the United States, hewas a native of Jamaica and wrote
(E) Because he was a native of Jamaica who spentmost of his life in the United States, the poetClaude McKay writing
2. Many ancient Eastern rulers favored drinking vesselsmade of celadon porcelain because of supposedlyrevealing the presence of poison by cracking.
(A) because of supposedly revealing the presence ofpoison
(B) for being supposed that it would reveal thepresence of poison
(C) because of being supposed to revealpoison in it
(D) for it was supposed to reveal that there is poison(E) because it was supposed to reveal the presence of
poison
3. John believes that plants respond to human attention,which causes his talking to his African violets everynight.
(A) attention, which causes his talking(B) attention and talking is what is done(C) attention and his talks(D) attention; for this reason has been his talking(E) attention; he therefore talks
4. All the demands on soprano Kathleen Battle foroperatic performances, solo concerts, and special guestappearances, tempting her to sing too often andstraining her voice.
(A) appearances, tempting her to sing too often andstraining
(B) appearances not only tempt her to sing too oftenplus they strain
(C) appearances tempts her not only into singing toooften but then she strains
(D) appearances, tempting her into singing too oftenand she therefore strains
(E) appearances tempt her to sing too often and strain
5455
5460
5465
5470
5475
5480
5485
5490
5495
5500
5505
5510
5515
5520
5. One reason that an insect can walk on walls while ahuman cannot is that the mass of its tiny body is farlower than humans.
(A) far lower than humans(B) far lower than that of a human’s body(C) lower by far than humans(D) far lower than a human(E) far lower than is a human’s body
6. In the 1980’s, the median price of a house more thandoubled, generally outdistancing the rate of inflation.
(A) generally outdistancing the rate of inflation(B) generally this outdistanced the rate of inflation(C) and the result was the general outdistancing of
inflation(D) the general rate of inflation was thus outdistanced(E) thus generally inflation had been outdistanced
7. In the nineteenth century, reproductions of cathedralsor castles made entirely of ice was often a popularfeature in North American winter carnivals.
(A) was often a popular feature(B) often were popular features(C) often was featured popularly(D) often being popular features(E) have been featured popularly
8. A fine orchestral performance will exhibit the skills ofthe musicians, their abilities to work as an ensemble,and how he or she responds to the conductor.
(A) how he or she responds(B) how to respond(C) their responding(D) their responses(E) they respond
9. The African tsetse fly does not need a brain, everythingit has to do in life is programmed into its nervoussystem.
(A) brain, everything(B) brain due to everything which(C) brain, for everything(D) brain; since, everything(E) brain whereas everything
10. She was concerned about how Hank would react tothe incident, but in searching his face, he did notseem to be at all embarrassed or troubled.
(A) in searching his face, he did not seem to be(B) by searching his face, it showed that he
was not(C) a search of his face showed that he seemed not(D) searching his face, he did not seem to be(E) his face being searched showed that he
was not
11. Explaining modern art is impossible, partly because ofits complexity but largely because of it rapidlychanging.
(A) of it rapidly changing(B) it makes rapid changes(C) of the rapidity with which it changes(D) changing it is rapid(E) it changes so rapid
175
5525
5530
5535
5540
5545
5550
5555
5560
5565
5570
5575
5580
5585
5590
5595
5600
5605
5610
The following sentences test your ability to recognizegrammar and usage errors. Each sentence contains eithera single error or no error at all. No sentence contains morethan one error. The error, if there is one, is underlinedand lettered. If the sentence contains an error, select theone underlined part that must be changed to make thesentence correct. If the sentence is correct, select choice E.In choosing answers, follow the requirements of standardwritten English.
EXAMPLE:
The other delegates and him immediately A B Caccepted the resolution drafted by the Dneutral states. No error
E
12. The ambassador was entertained lavish by
A
Hartwright, whose company has a monetary
B C
interest in the industrial development of the
D
new country. No error
E
13. Among the discoveries made possible by
A B
the invention of the telescope they found that
C D
dark spots existed on the Sun in varying numbers.
No error
E
14. This liberal arts college has decided requiring
A B
all students to study at least one non-European
C D
language. No error
E
15. Twenty-five years after Alex Haley’s Roots stimulate
A B
many people to research their family histories, new
C
technology has been developed to make the task
easier . No error
D E
16. For months the press had praised Thatcher’s handling
of the international crisis, and editorial views changed
A
quickly when the domestic economy worsened .
B C D
No error
E
17. Experiments have shown that human skin provides
A B
natural protection against a surprising large
C
number of infectious bacteria. No error
D E
18. In the aggressive society created by William Golding
A
in Lord of the Flies, both Ralph and Jack emerge
early on as the leader of the lost boys. No error
B C D E
19. More than forty years have passed since a quarter
A B
of a million people marched on Washington, D.C.,
in an attempt to secure civil rights for Black
C D
Americans. No error
E
5615
5620
5625
5630
5635
5640
5645
5650
5655
5660
5665
5670
5675
5680
5685
20. Careful analysis of pictures of the Moon reveal that
A
parts of the Moon’s surface are markedly similar to
B C
parts of the Earth’s . No error
D E
21. London differs from other cities, such as Paris and
A B
New York, in that its shopping areas are so widely
C D
spread out. No error
E
22. The architect’s research shows that even when builders
construct houses of stone , they still use the hammer
A B C
more than any tool. No error
D E
23. Of the two options, neither the system of appointing
A B
judges to the bench nor the process of electing judges
C
are entirely satisfactory. No error
D E
24. Carlos cherished the memory of the day when him
A
and his sister Rosa were presented with awards
B
in recognition of meritorious service to the
C D
community. No error
E
25. The famous filmmaker had a tendency of changing
A B
his recollections, perhaps out of boredom at having
C D
to tell interviewers the same story over and over.
No error
E
26. Norwegian writer Sigrid Undset is like the novelist Sir
A
Walter Scott in her use of historical backgrounds, but
B
unlike his books , she dwells on the psychological
C
aspects of her characters. No error
D E
27. The television station has received many complaints
A
about the clothing advertisements, which some
B C
viewers condemn to be tasteless. No error
D E
28. The relationship between goby fish and striped shrimp
are truly symbiotic , for neither can survive without
A B C D
the other. No error
E
29. Winston Churchill, unlike many English prime
A
ministers before him , had deep insight into the
B C
workings of the human mind. No error
D E
5690
5695
5700
5705
5710
5715
5720
5725
5730
5735
5740
5745
5750
5755
5760
5765
5770
180
Directions: The following passage is an early draft of anessay. Some parts of the passage need to be rewritten.
Read the passage and select the best answers for thequestions that follow. Some questions are about particularsentences or parts of sentences and ask you to improvesentence structure or word choice. Other questions ask youto consider organization and development. In choosinganswers, follow the requirements of standard written English.
Questions 30-35 are based on the following passage.
(1) My father has an exceptional talent. (2) Theability to understand people. (3) When I have a problemthat I think no one else will understand, I take it to myfather. (4) He listens intently, asks me some questions,and my feelings are seemingly known by him exactly.(5) Even my twin sister can talk to him more easily thanto me. (6) Many people seem too busy to take the timeto understand one another. (7) My father, by allaccounts, sees taking time to listen as essential to anyrelationship, whether it involves family, friendship, orwork.
(8) At work, my father’s friends and work associatesbenefit from this talent. (9) His job requires him to attendsocial events and sometimes I go along. (10) I havewatched him at dinner; his eyes are fixed on whoever isspeaking, and he nods his head at every remark. (11) Myfather emerges from such a conversation with what I believeis a true sense of the speaker’s meaning. (12) In the sameway, we choose our friends.
(13) My father’s ability to listen affects his wholelife. (14) His ability allows him to form strongrelationships with his coworkers and earns himlasting friendships. (15) It allows him to have openconversations with his children. (16) Furthermore, ithas strengthened his relationship with my mother.(17) Certainly, his talent is one that I hope to developas I mature.
30. Of the following, which is the best way to revise andcombine sentences 1 and 2 (reproduced below) ?
My father has an exceptional talent. The ability tounderstand people.
(A) My father has an exceptional talent and the abilityto understand people.
(B) My father has an exceptional talent that includesthe ability to understand people.
(C) My father has an exceptional talent: the ability tounderstand people.
(D) My father has an exceptional talent, it is hisability to understand people.
(E) Despite my father’s exceptional talent, he still hasthe ability to understand people.
31. Of the following, which is the best way to phrasesentence 4 (reproduced below) ?
He listens intently, asks me some questions, and myfeelings are seemingly known by him exactly.
(A) (As it is now)(B) Listening intently, he will ask me some questions
and then my exact feelings are seemingly knownto him.
(C) As he listens to me and asks me some questions,he seems to be knowing exactly my feelings.
(D) He listened to me and asked me some questions,seeming to know exactly how I felt.
(E) He listens intently, asks me some questions, andthen seems to know exactly how I feel.
32. In sentence 7, the phrase by all accounts is bestreplaced by
(A) however(B) moreover(C) to my knowledge(D) like my sister(E) but nevertheless
33. Which of the following sentences should be omitted toimprove the unity of the second paragraph?
(A) Sentence 8(B) Sentence 9(C) Sentence 10(D) Sentence 11(E) Sentence 12
5775
5780
5785
5790
5795
5800
5805
5810
5815
5820
5825
5830
5835
5840
5845
5850
5855
5860
5865
5870
34. In context, which of the following is the best way tophrase the underlined portion of sentence 16(reproduced below) ?
Furthermore, it has strengthened his relationship withmy mother.
(A) (As it is now)(B) Further strengthening(C) But it strengthens(D) However, he is strengthening(E) Considering this, he strengthens
35. A strategy that the writer uses within the thirdparagraph is to
(A) make false assumptions and use exaggeration(B) include difficult vocabulary(C) repeat certain words and sentence patterns(D) argue in a tone of defiance(E) turn aside from the main subject
5875
5880
5885
5890
5895
5900
5905
5910
5915
5920
5925
5930
5935
5940
5945
SECTION 4 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
23 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Scientific discoveries are often thought of as the resultof ------- effort, but many discoveries have, in fact,arisen from ------- or a mistake.
(A) conscientious . . a method(B) incidental . . a mishap(C) collaborative . . a design(D) persistent . . an extension(E) systematic . . an accident
2. Nations that share a border are, by definition, -------.
(A) allied (B) partisan (C) contiguous(D) pluralistic (E ) sovereign
3. Much of this author’s work, unfortunately, is -------,with ------- chapter often immediately following asublime one.
(A) mystical . . a superior(B) uneven . . a mediocre(C) predictable . . an eloquent(D) enthralling . . a vapid(E) flippant . . an intelligible
4. In young children, some brain cells have a ------- thatenables them to take over the functions of damagedor missing brain cells.
(A) fragility (B) reminiscence(C) perniciousness (D) whimsicality(E) plasticity
5. “Less government spending” is ------- of this politicalparty, a belief shared by most party members.
(A) an acronym (B) a retraction (C) a tenet(D) a plight (E) a prospectus
185
5950
5955
5960
5965
5970
5975
5980
5985
5990
5995
6000
6005
6010
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
6015
Questions 6-7 are based on the following passage.
Duke Ellington considered himself “the world’s greatestlistener.” In music, hearing is all. Judging by the two orthree thousand pieces of music Ellington wrote, he couldprobably hear a flea scratching itself and put that rhythminto one of his compositions. 5 For him the sounds of theworld were the ingredients he mixed into appetizers,main courses, and desserts to satisfy the appetite of hisworldwide audience. He wasn’t averse to going out ina boat to catch the fish himself. He would raise the fowlhimself. But when that musical meal appeared before younone of the drudgery showed.
6. The author most likely refers to the “flea” in line 4in order to
(A) highlight Ellington’s prodigious memory(B) emphasize the quality of Ellington’s listening
skills(C) indicate Ellington’s interest in different animal
sounds(D) suggest that Ellington’s compositions were
marked by rhythmic similarities(E) imply that Ellington could be overly concerned
about minutia
7. In lines 5-11 (“For him . . . drudgery showed”),the author’s point is primarily developed throughthe use of
(A) comparison and contrast(B) appeal to emotion(C) exaggeration(D) metaphor(E) humor
Questions 8-9 are based on the following passage.
In the summer of 1911, the explorer Hiram Bingham IIIbushwhacked his way to a high ridge in the Andes of Peru
and beheld a dreamscape out of the past. There, set againstlooming peaks cloaked in snow and wreathed in clouds,was Machu Picchu, the famous “lost city” of the Incas.This expression, popularized by Bingham, served asa magical elixir for rundown imaginations. The wordsevoked the romanticism of exploration and archaeologyat the time. But finding Machu Picchu was easier thansolving the mystery of its place in the rich and powerfulInca empire. The imposing architecture attested to the skilland audacity of the Incas. But who had lived at this isolatedsite and for what purpose?
8. The words “magical elixir” (line 18) primarilyemphasize the
(A) motivation for an expedition(B) captivating power of a phrase(C) inspiration behind a discovery(D) creative dimension of archaeology(E) complexity of an expression
9. The “mystery” discussed in lines 21-24 is mostanalogous to that encountered in which of thefollowing situations?
(A) Being unable to locate the source of materialsused to construct an ancient palace
(B) Being unable to reconcile archaeological evi-dencewith mythical descriptions of anancient city
(C) Being unable to explain how ancient peoplesconstructed imposing monuments usingonly primitive technology
(D) Being unable to understand the religiousfunction of a chamber found inside anancient temple
(E) Being unable to discover any trace of a civ-ilizationrepeatedly mentioned by ancientauthors
6020
6025
6030
6035
190
Questions 10-14 are based on the following passage.
This passage is from the preface to a 1997 book bya United States journalist detailing a disagreementbetween doctors and family members about a child’smedical treatment at a hospital in California.
Under my desk I keep a large carton of cassette tapes.Though they have all been transcribed, I still like to listento them from time to time.
Some are quiet and easily understood. They are filledwith the voices of American doctors, interrupted occasion-ally by the clink of a coffee cup or beep of a pager. Therest—more than half of them—are very noisy. They arefilled with the voices of the Lees family, Hmong refugeesfrom Laos who came to the United States in 1980. Againsta background of babies crying, children playing, doorsslamming, dishes clattering, a television yammering, and anair conditioner wheezing, I can hear the mother’s voice, byturns breathy, nasal, gargly, or humlike as it slides up anddown the Hmong language’s eight tones; the father’s voice,louder, slower, more vehement; and my interpreter’s voice,mediating in Hmong and English, low and deferential ineach. The hubbub summons sense-memories: the coolnessof the red metal folding chair, reserved for guests, that wasalways set up when I arrived in the apartment; the shadowscast by the amulet that hung from the ceiling and swung inthe breeze on its length of grocer’s twine; the tastes ofHmong food.
I sat on the Lees’ red chair for the first time onMay 19, 1988. Earlier that spring I had come to Merced,California, because I had heard that there were somemisunderstandings at the county hospital between itsHmong patients and medical staff. One doctor called them“collisions,” which made it sound as if two different kindsof people had rammed into each other, head on, to theaccompaniment of squealing brakes and breaking glass.As it turned out, the encounters were messy but rarelyfrontal. Both sides were wounded, but neither side seemedto know what had hit it or how to avoid another crash.
I have always felt that the action most worth watchingoccurs not at the center of things but where edges meet.I like shorelines, weather fronts, international borders.These places have interesting frictions and incongruities,and often, if you stand at the point of tangency, you cansee both sides better than if you were in the middle of eitherone. This is especially true when the apposition is cultural.When I first came to Merced, I hoped that the culture ofAmerican medicine, about which I knew a little, and theculture of the Hmong, about which I knew nothing, wouldsomehow illuminate each other if I could position myselfbetween the two and manage not to get caught in the cross-fire. But after getting to know the Lees family and their
daughter’s doctors and realizing how hard it was to blameanyone, I stopped analyzing the situation in such linearterms. Now, when I play the tapes late at night, I imaginewhat they would sound like if I could splice them together,so the voices of the Hmong and those of the Americandoctors could be heard on a single tape, speaking acommon language.
10. In line 17, “summons” most nearly means
(A) sends for(B) calls forth(C) requests(D) orders(E) convenes
11. It can be inferred from lines 27-33 that “collisions”was NOT an apt description because the
(A) clash between Hmong patients and medicalstaff was indirect and baffling
(B) Hmong patients and the medical staff werenot significantly affected by the encounters
(C) medical staff was not responsible for thedissatisfaction of the Hmong patients
(D) misunderstandings between the Hmongpatients and the medical staff were easy toresolve
(E) disagreement reached beyond particularindividuals to the community at large
12. Which of the following views of conflict is bestsupported by lines 37-40 (“These . . . one”) ?
(A) Efforts to prevent conflicts are not alwayssuccessful.
(B) Conflict can occur in many different guises.(C) In most conflicts, both parties are to blame.(D) You can understand two parties that have resolved
their conflicts better than two parties that arecurrently in conflict.
(E) You can learn more about two parties in conflictas an observer than as an involved participant.
6040
6045
6050
6055
6060
6065
6070
6075
6080
6085
6090
13. According to lines 41-46 (“When I . . . crossfire”), theauthor’s initial goal was to
(A) consider the perspectives of both the Americandoctors and the Lees family to see what insightsmight develop
(B) serve as a counselor to the county hospital’sHmong patients in order to ease their anxieties
(C) work out a compromise between the Americandoctors and the Lees family
(D) acquire a greater knowledge of how the Americanmedical culture serves patients
(E) try to reduce the misunderstandings between theAmerican doctors and the Lees family andpromote good will
14. At the end of the passage, the author suggests thatit would be ideal if the
(A) differences between the Lees family and theAmerican doctors could be resolved quickly
(B) concerns and opinions of the Lees family andthe American doctors could be merged
(C) American doctors could take the time to learnmore about their Hmong patients
(D) Hmong patients could become more vocal indefense of their rights
(E) Hmong patients could get medical treatmentconsistent with their cultural beliefs
6095
6100
6105
6110
6115
6120
6125
6130
6135
6140
6145
6150
6155
6160
6165
6170
Questions 15-23 are based on the following passages.
“Cloning” is the creation of a new individual from theunique DNA (or genetic information) of another. The suc-cessful cloning of a sheep named Dolly in 1997 sparkeda debate over the implications of cloning humans. Eachof the passages below was written in 1997.
Passage 1
Cloning creates serious issues of identity and individual-ity. The cloned person may experience concerns about hisor her distinctive identity, not only because the person willbe in genotype (genetic makeup) and appearance identical toanother human being, but, in this case, because he or shemay also be twin to the person who is the “father” or“mother”—if one can still call them that. What would bethe psychic burdens of being the “child” or “parent” of yourtwin? The cloned individual, moreover, will be saddledwith a genotype that has already lived. He or she will notbe fully a surprise to the world.
People will likely always compare a clone’s performancein life with that of the original. True, a clonedperson’s nurture and circumstances in life will be different;genotype is not exactly destiny. Still, one must also expectparental and other efforts to shape this new life after theoriginal—or at least to view the child with the originalvision always firmly in mind. Why else then would theyclone from the star basketball player, mathematician, andbeauty queen—or even dear old dad—in the first place?
Since the birth of Dolly, there has been a fair amount ofdoublespeak on this matter of genetic identity. Experts haverushed in to reassure the public that the clone would in noway be the same person, or have any confusions about hisor her identity; they are pleased to point out that the cloneof film star Julia Roberts would not be Julia Roberts. Fairenough. But one is shortchanging the truth by emphasizingthe additional importance of the environment, rearing, andsocial setting: genotype obviously matters plenty. That,after all, is the only reason to clone, whether human beingsor sheep. The odds that clones of basketball star Larry Birdwill play basketball are, I submit, infinitely greater thanthey are for clones of jockey Willie Shoemaker.
Passage 2
Given all the brouhaha, you’d think it was crystal clearwhy cloning human beings is unethical. But what exactlyis wrong with it? What would a clone be? Well, he or shewould be a complete human being who happens to sharethe same genes with another person. Today, we call suchpeople identical twins. To my knowledge no one hasargued that twins are immoral. “You should treat all cloneslike you would treat all monozygous [identical] twins ortriplets,” concludes Dr. H. Tristam Engelhardt, a professor
of medicine at Baylor and a philosopher at Rice University.“That’s it.” It would be unethical to treat a human clone asanything other than a human being.
Some argue that the existence of clones would underminethe uniqueness of each human being. “Can individuality,identity, and dignity be severed from genetic distinctive-ness, and from belief in a person’s open future?” askspolitical thinker George Will. Will and others havefallen under the sway of what one might call “geneticessentialism,” the belief that genes almost completelydetermine who a person is. But a person who is a clonewould live in a very different world from that of his or hergenetic predecessor. With greatly divergent experiences,their brains would be wired differently. After all, eventwins who grow up together are separate people—distinctindividuals with different personalities and certainly nolack of Will’s “individuality, identity, and dignity.”
But what about cloning exceptional human beings?George Will put it this way: “Suppose a clone ofbasketball star Michael Jordan, age 8, preferred violin tobasketball? Is it imaginable? If so, would it be tolerableto the cloner?” Yes, it is imaginable, and the cloner wouldjust have to put up with violin recitals. Kids are not com-mercial property. Overzealous parents regularly push their children into sports, music, and dance lessons, but given thestubborn nature of individuals, those parents rarely manageto make kids stick forever to something they hate. A ban oncloning wouldn’t abolish pushy parents.
15. The authors of both passages agree that
(A) genetic characteristics alone cannot determinea person’s behavior
(B) a formal code of ethical rules will be needed oncehuman beings can be cloned
(C) people who are cloned from others may havegreater professional opportunities
(D) identical twins and triplets could provide usefuladvice to people related through cloning
(E) cloning human beings is a greater technologicalchallenge than cloning sheep
16. In line 13, the author of Passage 1 uses the word“True” to indicate
(A) acknowledgement that the passage’s openingarguments are tenuous
(B) recognition of a potential counterargument(C) conviction about the accuracy of the facts
presented(D) distrust of those who insist on pursuing
cloning research(E) certainty that cloning will one day become
commonplace
195
6175
6180
6185
6190
6195
6200
6205
6210
6215
6220
6225
6230
6235
6240
17. The question in lines 18-20 (“Why else . . . first place”)chiefly serves to
(A) suggest that some issues are not easily resolved(B) argue for the importance of parents in the lives
of children(C) offer an anecdote revealing the flaw in a popular
misconception(D) imply that cloning might displace more familiar
means of reproduction(E) suggest the value perceived in a person who
might be selected for cloning
18. In line 21, “fair” most nearly means
(A) considerable(B) pleasing(C) ethical(D) just(E) promising
19. The author of Passage 1 mentions two sports stars(lines 31-33) in order to
(A) argue against genetic analysis of any sportsstar’s physical abilities
(B) distinguish between lasting fame and merecelebrity
(C) clarify the crucial role of rigorous, sustainedtraining
(D) highlight the need for greater understanding ofthe athletes’ genetic data
(E) suggest that athletes’ special skills have a geneticcomponent
20. In line 49, “open” most nearly means
(A) overt(B) frank(C) unrestricted(D) unprotected(E) public
21. In line 55, “divergent experiences” emphasizes thatwhich of the following is particularly important fora developing child?
(A) Character(B) Heritage(C) Intelligence(D) Environment(E) Personality
22. In the quotation in lines 61-64, George Willprimarily draws attention to
(A) a weakness inherent in cloning theory(B) a goal that some advocates of cloning
might share(C) the limitations of human individuality(D) the likelihood that children will rebel
against their parents(E) the extent to which a cloned person
might differ from the original person
23. Both passages base their arguments on the unstatedassumption that
(A) genetic distinctiveness is crucial to humansurvival as a species
(B) public concern about human cloning willeventually diminish
(C) human cloning is a genuine possibility inthe future
(D) individualism is less prized today than it hasbeen in the past
(E) technological advances have had a mostlypositive impact on society
6245
6250
6255
6260
6265
6270
6275
6280
6285
6290
6295
6300
6305
6310
6315
6320
6325
6330
6335
SECTION 6 CRITICAL READING
Time - 25 minutes
25 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Common garlic has ------- properties; during theFirst World War British medics saved thousandsof lives by wrapping wounds with garlic-soakedbandages.
(A) curative (B) flavoring (C) inferior(D) questionable (E) infamous
2. In her poems, Alice Walker retrieves and ------- partsof Black culture that some have been all too quick to------- the past as fossilized artifacts.
(A) revitalizes . . consign to(B) conjoins . . exclude from(C) realigns . . salvage from(D) diffuses . . defer to(E) refracts . . impose on
3. The modest acceptance speech of the Academy Award-winning actress revealed a ------- that contrasted withher uninhibited screen performances.
(A) theatricality (B) sullenness(C) flamboyance (D) reserve(E) nonchalance
4. Because howler monkeys rarely come out of the treesin their arboreal habitat, the continued well-being ofthe rain forest is ------- to their survival.
(A) inadequate (B) tangential(C) indispensable (D) baneful(E) expeditious
5. Doug was both ------- and -------: he possessedpenetrating acuity and discernment and was alsoextremely humble.
(A) diligent . . supercilious(B) perspicacious . . unpretentious(C) obtuse . . penitent(D) sagacious . . imposing(E) apologetic . . unassuming
6. The Mona Lisa, shipped in a private cabin and receivedby important dignitaries, was treated more like -------than a painting upon its arrival in the United States.
(A) a perfectionist (B) a maverick (C) a potentate(D) an ascetic (E) an interloper
7. Despite its patent -------, this belief has becomeso ------- that no amount of rational argumentwill suffice to eradicate it.
(A) validity . . inconsequential(B) implausibility . . entrenched(C) credibility . . prevalent(D) absurdity . . outmoded(E) novelty . . infrequent
8. The charlatan’s seemingly frank and open demeanorwas actually a ------- means of enlisting his patient’sconfidence.
(A) disingenuous (B) debilitating(C) diminutive (D) cathartic(E) prosaic
6340
6345
6350
6355
6360
6365
6370
6375
6380
6385
6390
6395
6400
6405
6410
6415
200
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
6420
Questions 9-13 are based on the following passages.
Passage 1
It is striking how our culture has wholeheartedlyadopted the recycling ethic. Most parents have probablyreceived humbling lectures from their children after tossinga glass jar or newspaper in the trash can. But the popularityof recycling is even more surprising considering the incon-veniences associated with it. Who hasn’t experienced theannoyance of trying to satisfy complicated rules about whatcan and cannot be recycled? Glass jars—but not their tops?Plastics number 1 and 2—but not number 3? Still there is no sign that the public is becoming impatient, so convincedare people of the virtues of recycling.
Passage 2
Mandatory recycling programs aren’t good for posterity.They offer mainly short-term benefits to a few groups—like politicians and waste-handling corporations—whilediverting money from genuine social and environmentalproblems. Recycling programs actually consume resources.They require extra administrators and a continual publicrelations campaign explaining what to do with dozens ofdifferent products—recycle milk jugs but not milk cartons,index cards but not construction paper. Collecting a ton ofrecyclable items is three times more expensive than collectinga ton of garbage because crews pick up less materialat each stop. Recycling may be the most wasteful activityin the modern United States: a waste of time and money,a waste of human and natural resources.
9. Which statement best characterizes the relationshipbetween Passage 1 and Passage 2 ?
(A) Passage 1 presents ethical objections to an actionthat Passage 2 also censures.
(B) Passage 1 mocks a group of people that Passage 2praises.
(C) Passage 1 describes a cultural phenomenon thatPassage 2 criticizes.
(D) Passage 1 discusses the historical foundationsof recycling, whereas Passage 2 considersthe future of recycling.
(E) Passage 1 describes people’s fascination withrecycling, whereas Passage 2 explains theprocess of sorting recyclables.
10. Unlike Passage 1, Passage 2 focuses primarily onrecycling’s
(A) philosophical foundations(B) economic impact
(C) popular appeal(D) moral implications(E) environmental benefits
11. The author of Passage 2 would most likely characterizethe “people” mentioned in line 11 as
(A) emotional(B) indecisive(C) unmotivated(D) undemanding(E) uninformed
12. The authors of both passages would most likely agreethat recycling rules are
(A) convoluted(B) commendable(C) unethical(D) antiquated(E) unenforceable
13. Compared to the tone of Passage 2, the tone ofPassage 1 is more
(A) pessimistic(B) arrogant(C) critical(D) scholarly(E) tempered
205
6425
6430
6435
6440
6445
Questions 14-25 are based on the following passage.
This passage is taken from a novel set in early twentieth-century England. Mrs. Deverell is the widow of a shop-keeper who lived and worked in Volunteer Street; theirdaughter Angel has become a best-selling novelist. Here,Mrs. Deverell finds herself in a new home that she andAngel share in the prosperous village of Alderhurst.
“I never thought I would live in such a beautiful place,”Mrs. Deverell told Angel when they first moved in. Butnowadays she often suffered from the lowering pain ofbelieving herself happy when she was not. “Who couldbe miserable in such a place?” she asked. Yet, on mistyOctober evenings or on Sundays, when the church bellsbegan, sensations she had never known before cameover her.
She sometimes felt better when she went back to seeher friends on Volunteer Street; but it was a long way togo. Angel discouraged the visits, and her friends seemedto have changed. Either they put out their best china andthought twice before they said anything, or they weredefiantly informal—“You’ll have to take us as you findus”—and would persist in making remarks like “Pardonthe apron, but there’s no servants here to polish the grate.”In each case, they were watching her for signs of grandeuror condescension. She fell into little traps they laid andthen they were able to report to the neighbors. “It hasn’ttaken her long to start putting on airs.” She had to beespecially careful to recognize everyone she met, andwalked up the street with an expression of anxiety whichwas misinterpreted as disdain.
The name “Deverell Family Grocer” stayed for a longtime over the shop, and she was pleased that it should,although Angel frowned with annoyance when she heardof it. Then one day the faded name was scraped and burntaway, and on her next visit to Volunteer Street, she sawthat “Cubbage’s Stores” was painted there instead. She feltan unaccountable panic and dismay at the sight of this andat the strange idea of other people and furniture in thosefamiliar rooms. “Very nice folk,” she was told. “She’sso friendly. Always the same. And such lovely kiddies.”Mrs. Deverell felt slighted and wounded; going homeshe was so preoccupied that she passed the wife of thelandlord of The Volunteer without seeing her. “I wouldn’texpect Alderhurst people to speak to a barkeep’s wife,”the woman told everyone in the saloon bar. “Even thoughit was our Gran who laid her husband out when he died.”All of their kindnesses were remembered and broodedover; any past kindness Mrs. Deverell had done—andthey were many—only served to underline the changewhich had come over her.
At a time of her life when she needed the security offamiliar things, these were put beyond her reach. It seemedto her that she had wasted her years acquiring skills whichin the end were to be of no use to her: her weather-eye for
a good drying day; her careful ear for judging the gentlesinging sound of meat roasting in the oven; her touch forthe freshness of meat; and how, by smelling a cake, shecould tell if it were baked. These arts, which had takenso long to perfect, fell now into disuse. She would neveragain, she grieved, gather up a great fragrant line ofwashing in her arms to carry indoors. One day when theyhad first come to the new house, she had passed throughthe courtyard where sheets were hanging out: she hadtaken them in her hands and, finding them just at the rightstage of drying, had begun to unpeg them. They werelooped all about her shoulders when Angel caught her.“Please leave work to the people who should do it,” shehad said. “You will only give offense.” She tried hardnot to give offense; but it was difficult. The smell ofironing being done or the sound of eggs being whiskedset up a restlessness which she could scarcely control.
The relationship of mother and daughter seemed tohave been reversed, and Angel, now in her early twenties,was the authoritative one; since girlhood she had beentaking on one responsibility after another, until she hadleft her mother with nothing to perplex her but how towhile away the hours when the servants were busy andher daughter was at work. Fretfully, she would wanderaround the house, bored, but afraid to interrupt; she waslike an intimidated child.
14. Which interpretation of Mrs. Deverell’s statementin line 1 (“I never . . . place”) is most fully supportedby the rest of the passage?
(A) It reveals an unsatisfied longing for beauty andcomfort.
(B) It suggests that Mrs. Deverell is unprepared forher new life.
(C) It illustrates Mrs. Deverell’s desire to impressher old friends.
(D) It hints at Mrs. Deverell’s increasing discomfortwith her daughter’s career.
(E) It indicates Mrs. Deverell’s inability to be happyin any environment.
15. The “sensations” (line 7) might best be describedas feelings of
(A) anger and bitterness(B) reverence and gratitude(C) dejection and isolation(D) nostalgia and serenity(E) empathy and concern
6450
6455
6460
6465
6470
6475
6480
6485
6490
6495
6500
6505
6510
6515
6520
16. The primary purpose of the second paragraph(lines 9-23) is to show Mrs. Deverell’s
(A) surprise that her friends have not forgotten her(B) nostalgia for her old neighborhood(C) feelings of superiority toward her friends(D) embarrassment about her former neighborhood(E) changing relationship with her friends
17. The author most likely quotes Mrs. Deverell’s friendsin lines 14-16 in order to
(A) voice a concern(B) dismiss a belief(C) illustrate an attitude(D) cite an authority(E) mock an undertaking
18. The speaker of the sentence quoted in lines 15-16(“Pardon . . . grate”) most likely intends to
(A) account for a peculiar style of dress(B) bemoan the lack of adequate help around
the house(C) frankly apologize for the messiness of
the family’s home(D) indirectly express resentment about
a difference in social status(E) overtly call attention to Mrs. Deverell’s
arrogant behaviour
19. Mrs. Deverell’s reaction to the remarks quotedin lines 32-33 suggests that she thinks that theseremarks
(A) contain an implicit criticism(B) mischaracterize the new family(C) are a poor attempt at humor(D) stem from an old grudge(E) insult the memory of her husband
20. Lines 40-43 (“All of . . . her”) suggest which of thefollowing about the customers in the saloon bar?
(A) They do not recall those occasions whenMrs. Deverell was kind to them.
(B) They feel that Mrs. Deverell is still essentiallythe same person that she has always been.
(C) They are not especially well acquainted withMrs. Deverell.
(D) They are more generous toward themselvesthan they are toward Mrs. Deverell.
(E) They do not generally share the opinions ofthe barkeeper’s wife.
21. Lines 45-52 (“It . . . disuse”) suggest which of thefollowing about the way that Mrs. Deverell had viewedthe task of running a household?
(A) She had believed some elements of it werebeneath her.
(B) She had understood the importance of itssensory aspects.
(C) She had developed a regimented system.(D) She had been afraid to ask Angel for her help.(E) She had relied on household help to perform
certain chores.
22. The use of “arts” in line 51 most directlyemphasizes the
(A) pride Mrs. Deverell’s family took inher housekeeping skills
(B) expertise Mrs. Deverell brought to herhousehold tasks
(C) importance of maintaining an orderly home(D) rewards of preparing elaborate meals(E) pleasure Mrs. Deverell found in teaching
young servants
6525
6530
6535
6540
6545
6550
6555
6560
6565
6570
6575
6580
6585
6590
6595
6600
6605
6610
6615
6620
210
23. Angel’s comments in lines 60-61 (“‘Please . . .offense’”) imply that
(A) Mrs. Deverell has inadequate housekeepingexperience
(B) many people enjoy the opportunity to performhousehold tasks
(C) Mrs. Deverell often hurts the feelings of others(D) domestic tasks are unsuitable for Mrs. Deverell’s
new social status(E) Mrs. Deverell is not a particularly efficient
worker
24. In line 69, “perplex” most nearly means
(A) trouble(B) bewilder(C) astonish(D) entangle(E) embarrass
25. In line 73, the author compares Mrs. Deverell toan “intimidated child” primarily in order to
(A) criticize Mrs. Deverell for her naive viewof the world
(B) show that Mrs. Deverell continues to bediminished in her new home
(C) imply that Mrs. Deverell cannot live upto her responsibilities
(D) indicate the simplicity of Mrs. Deverell’snew life
(E) justify Angel’s dismissal of her mother’sfeelings
6625
6630
6635
6640
6645
6650
6655
6660
6665
6670
6675
6680
6685
6690
6695
SECTION 9 CRITICAL READING
Time – 20 minutes
19 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Unable to discover how the fire started, the inspectorsfiled a tentative report stating that the cause was -------.
(A) noteworthy (B) definitive (C) fundamental(D) conclusive (E) indeterminate
2. The celebrants at the ------- party for Cinco De Mayowere understandably ------- by the spectacle of themariachi bands and the colorful piñatas for thechildren.
(A) somber . . amused(B) lavish . . dazzled(C) novel . . jaded(D) mundane . . astounded(E) joyous . . stymied
3. “Hawaii” refers both to the group of islands knownas the Hawaiian islands and to the largest island inthat -------.
(A) flora (B) sierra (C) archipelago(D) flotilla (E) savanna
4. Given the exponential growth of scientific knowledge,medicine is far less ------- unsubstantiated fads thanit used to be; its record of folly, however, remainsan undeniable -------.
(A) suspicious of . . qualification(B) averse to . . encumbrance(C) vulnerable to . . embarrassment(D) dependent on . . impossibility(E) ignorant of . . oversight
5. The aspiring writer, who remained ------- even afterbeing rejected by several major publishers, felt certainof achieving literary -------.
(A) hopeless . . vindication(B) disgruntled . . talent(C) optimistic . . abasement(D) undaunted . . celebrity(E) obsequious . . neglect
6. Fred often used ------- to achieve his professionalgoals, even though such artful subterfuge alienatedhis colleagues.
(A) chicanery (B) diligence (C) bombast(D) disputation (E) consensus
6700
6705
6710
6715
6720
6725
6730
6735
6740
6745
6750
6755
6760
6765
6770
The passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or impliedin the passage and in any introductory material that may be provided.
215
Questions 7-19 are based on the following passage.
In the following passage from a newspaper commentarywritten in 1968, an architecture critic discusses oldtheaters and concert halls.
After 50 years of life and 20 years of death, the greatAdler and Sullivan Auditorium in Chicago is back inbusiness again. Orchestra Hall, also in Chicago, wasbeautifully spruced up for its sixty-eighth birthday. InSt. Louis, a 1925 movie palace has been successfullytransformed into Powell Symphony Hall, complete withhandsome bar from New York’s demolished MetropolitanOpera House.
Sentimentalism? Hardly. This is no more than apractical coming of cultural age, a belated recognitionthat fine old buildings frequently offer the most for themoney in an assortment of values, including cost, andabove all, that new cultural centers do not a culturemake. It indicates the dawning of certain sensibilities,perspectives, and standards without which arts programsare mockeries of everything the arts stand for.
The last decade has seen city after city rush pell-mellinto the promotion of great gobs of cultural real estate. Ithas seen a few good new theaters and a lot of bad ones,temples to bourgeois muses with all the panache of sub-urban shopping centers. The practice has been to treat thearts in chamber-of-commerce, rather than in creative,terms. That is just as tragic as it sounds.
The trend toward preservation is significant not onlybecause it is saving and restoring some superior buildingsthat are testimonials to the creative achievements of othertimes, but also because it is bucking the conventionalwisdom of the conventional power structure that providesthe backing for conventional cultural centers to house thearts.
That wisdom, as it comes true-blue from the hearts andminds of real estate dealers and investment bankers, is thatyou don’t keep old buildings; they are obsolete. Anythingnew is better than anything old and anything big is betterthan anything small, and if a few cultural values are lostalong the way, it is not too large a price to pay. In addition,the new, big buildings must be all in one place so they willshow. They’ll not only serve the arts, they’ll improve thesurrounding property values. Build now, and fill them later.
At the same time, tear down the past, rip out culturalroots, erase tradition, rub out the architectural evidence thatthe arts flowered earlier in our cities and enriched them andthat this enrichment is culture. Substitute a safe and sanitarystatus symbol for the loss. Put up the shiny mediocrities ofthe present and demolish the shabby masterpieces of the
past. That is the ironic other side of the “cultural explosion”coin. In drama, and in life, irony and tragedy go hand inhand.
Chicago’s Auditorium is such a masterpiece. With its
glowing, golden ambiance, its soaring arches and super-stage from which whispers can be heard in the far reachesof the theater, it became a legend in its own time. One ofthe great nineteenth-century works of Louis Sullivan andDankmar Adler and an anchor point of modern architectural history, it has been an acknowledged model of acousticaland aesthetic excellence. (Interestingly, the Auditorium isa hard theater in which to install microphones today, andmany modern performers, untrained in balance and pro-jection and reliant on technical mixing of sound, find ithard to function in a near-perfect house.)
Until October 1967, the last performance at the Auditor-ium was of Hellzapoppin’ in 1941, and the last use of thegreat stage was for bowling alleys during the Second WorldWar. Closed after that, it settled into decay for the next20 years. Falling plaster filled the hall, and the golden ceil-ing was partly ruined by broken roof drains. Last fall theAuditorium reopened, not quite in its old glory, but closeto it. The splendors of the house were traced in the eight-candlepower glory of carbon-filament lightbulbs of thesame kind used in 1889 when the theater, and electricity,were new. Their gentle brilliance picked out restored archi-tectural features in warm gilt and umber.
We have never had greater technical means or expertiseto make our landmarks bloom. The question is no longerwhether we can bring old theaters back to new brilliance,but whether we can fill them when they’re done. As withthe new centers, that will be the acid cultural test.
7. The principal function of the opening paragraph is to
(A) introduce the concept of conventional arts centers(B) illustrate the trend toward revitalization of cultural
landmarks(C) explore the connection between classical archi-
tecture and the arts(D) provide an explanation for the theater’s resurgent
popularity(E) contrast the beauty of old theaters with ordinary
modern buildings
6775
6780
6785
6790
6795
6800
6805
6810
6815
6820
6825
6830
6835
6840
6845
6850
8. On the basis of information provided in the rest of thepassage, the word “death” (line 1) best conveys
(A) flagging attendance(B) wartime malaise(C) demolition(D) neglect(E) disrepute
9. The bar mentioned in line 7 had apparently been
(A) costly but symbolic(B) beautiful but outdated(C) enlarged and elongated(D) treasured and imitated(E) rescued and relocated
10. The question in line 9 is intended to
(A) expose the folly of the new construction(B) convey the emotional burdens of the past(C) provide a typical explanation for the renovations(D) lament the decline of cultural values(E) address the public’s indifference toward old
buildings
11. In lines 13-14, the phrase “new . . . make” mostdirectly suggests that
(A) modern architects lack the artistic reputations oftheir predecessors
(B) the commercial treatment of culture encouragesart that is mass-produced
(C) culture evolves out of tradition and cannot beinstantly created
(D) historically significant venues positively influencethe creative process
(E) new cultural centers should be constructed incollaboration with artists
12. The description in lines 20-21 (“temples . . . centers”)best serves to
(A) scorn the architects’ commitment to historicallyaccurate renovations
(B) mock the timeworn theatrical works showcased inmodern cultural centers
(C) deprecate the appearance and character of manynew theaters
(D) downplay the government’s efforts to support thearts
(E) poke good-humored fun at commercialestablishments
13. As described in lines 17-23, the “practice” refers to the
(A) commercialization of culture(B) preservation of cultural treasures(C) construction of shopping centers(D) government funding of the arts(E) distortion of theatrical works
14. In lines 27-30, the author uses the word “conventional”several times in order to
(A) reveal the performers’ frustration with moderntheaters
(B) disparage the present-day treatment of the arts(C) parody the creative efforts of contemporary artists(D) emphasize the absurdity of a purely aesthetic
approach to the arts(E) exaggerate the importance of tradition in the arts
15. The fifth paragraph (lines 31-39) primarily serves to(A) criticize the way in which cultural buildings are
viewed as commodities
(B) assess the positive impact of the architects’backlash against mediocrity
(C) contrast the business practices of real estatebrokers with those of bankers
(D) enumerate the costs and benefits of restoringhistoric landmarks
(E) question the importance of the arts to society
6855
6860
6865
6870
6875
6880
6885
6890
6895
6900
6905
6910
6915
6920
6925
6930
6935
6940
6945
6950
6955
220
16. What does the imagery in lines 40-43 suggest?
(A) The dawning of an enlightened artistic sensibilityhas stimulated support for preserving historictheaters.
(B) The ill-conceived mandate to destroy architecturalmasterpieces epitomizes the censorship ofcreative expression.
(C) The desire for societal status symbols drives theconstruction of grandiose cultural centers.
(D) The demolition of a historic landmark istantamount to the destruction of an invaluablecultural legacy.
(E) The restoration of intimate old theaters will speedthe demise of large new arenas.
17. In lines 49-56, the description of the building primarilyserves to
(A) convey an appreciation for the technicalcomplexities of renovating theaters
(B) illustrate how nineteenth-century architecturedirectly influenced modern building design
(C) highlight some unique aspects of an exampleof fine architecture
(D) explain why some people disdain innovativearchitecture
(E) show how restoration can strip a building ofits unique character
18. In lines 56-60, the author’s comment about microphonesimplies that
(A) the near-perfect acoustics in a new theater divertattention from the building’s aesthetic flaws
(B) audience members seated in the theater’s balconycannot fully appreciate the nuances of theperformers’ intonations
(C) the performances of modern-day actors tend to beoverly dependent on technology
(D) the absence of technically sophisticatedequipment has jeopardized the sound quality ofperformances
(E) old theaters can remain viable because theyreadily accommodate the new sound technologythat enhances a performance
19. Which challenge is emphasized by the author in thefinal paragraph (lines 73-77) ?
(A) Designating theaters as historical landmarks(B) Renewing a respect for architecture(C) Providing opportunities for new artists(D) Reviving classical plays(E) Attracting appreciative audiences
6960
6965
6970
6975
6980
6985
6990
6995
7000
7005
7010
7015
7020
7025
7030
7035
7040
7045
7050
SECTION 10 WRITING
Time – 10 minutes
14 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. People were unprepared for the sinking of theTitanic simply because of believing that the shipwas unsinkable.
(A) of believing that the ship was unsinkable(B) of having a belief in the ship as unsinkable(C) they believed that the ship was unsinkable(D) they believed the unsinkable nature of
the ship(E) of a belief on their part of an
unsinkable ship
2. When the weather forecaster predicts a severe storm,this is when people usually rush to the supermarket tostock up on groceries.
(A) storm, this is when people usually rush(B) storm is usually when people are rushing(C) storm is why people usually rush(D) storm, people usually rush(E) storm, it usually rushes people
3. When, after bleak and lonely years in an Englishpublic school, he returned to India, there was suddenlyperceived by himself a strong desire to write about thepeople and land he loved.
(A) there was suddenly perceived by himself(B) he suddenly was perceived(C) suddenly the feeling that came to him being(D) he suddenly felt(E) suddenly he had the feeling of
4. Curiosity about other people, about the ways they thinkand act, has caused Jeff to meet some fascinatingcharacters as well as people which also really borehim.
(A) people which also really bore him(B) he encountered really boring people(C) very boring people are also met(D) some very boring people(E) very boring people also
5. During seasons when ticks carrying Lyme disease aremost prevalent, signs could be posted to deter hikersabout their venturing into tick-infested areas.
(A) about their venturing(B) from their venturing(C) from venturing(D) by not venturing(E) not to venture
7055
7060
7065
7070
7075
7080
7085
7090
7095
7100
7105
7110
7115
6. After Morris had spent ten minutes giving an answer,Claudette found he had given her only one item ofinformation beyond what she already knew.
(A) beyond what she already knew(B) beyond what she knows already(C) beyond her knowledge at the current time(D) to add to what she knew already presently(E) in addition to her present knowledge then
7. Although the kings and queens of England areconsidered Canada’s monarchs, true political powerlies with the prime minister, that person is elected bythe Canadian citizenry.
(A) true political power lies with the prime minister,that person is elected
(B) the person who holds true political power is theprime minister, which is elected
(C) true political power lies with the prime minister,who is elected
(D) the prime minister, the source of true politicalpower, elected
(E) true political power is with the prime minister andis elected
8. Led by vocalist Marlena McGhee Smalls, Gullahtradition is preserved by the help of the HallelujahSingers of South Carolina through songs and stories.
(A) Gullah tradition is preserved by the help of theHallelujah Singers of South Carolina throughsongs and stories
(B) the Hallelujah Singers of South Carolina help topreserve Gullah tradition through songs andstories
(C) the songs and stories of Gullah tradition arepreserved through the Hallelujah Singersof South Carolina
(D) it is the Hallelujah Singers that help to preservethe songs and stories of Gullah tradition in SouthCarolina
(E) South Carolina’s Gullah tradition is preservedthrough songs and stories by the HallelujahSingers
9. Astronomy is the study of celestial bodies in outerspace, especially their positions, dimensions,movements, and composition.
(A) especially their positions, dimensions, move-ments, and composition
(B) and especially they are concerned with theirpositions, dimensions, movements, andcomposition
(C) especially studying their positions, dimensions,movements, and composition
(D) especially their positions, dimensions, move-ments, and with their composition
(E) with special study of their positions, dimensions,movements, and including composition
10. All the talk about controlling noise, keeping riversclean, and planting trees have not impressed peopleenough to be bringing about major changes in laws andlifestyles.
(A) have not impressed people enough to be bringing(B) have not made enough of an impression on peopleto bring(C) have not made people impressed enough to bring(D) has not impressed people enough to bring(E) has not made enough people impressed forbringing
11. The furnace exploded, blowing off the door, sprayinggreasy soot all over the basement floor, and it wouldrattle furniture and windowpanes throughout thebuilding.
(A) it would rattle(B) it rattled(C) causing the rattling of(D) the result was to rattle(E) rattling
225
7120
7125
7130
7135
7140
7145
7150
7155
7160
7165
7170
7175
7180
7185
7190
7195
7200
7205
7210
7215
12. The adaptation of a novel for the screen often requiresmajor adjustments in plot because the one art formdiffers from the other in having other character-revelation techniques.
(A) because the one art form differs from the other inhaving other character-revelation techniques
(B) because the two art forms reveal characterin different ways
(C) because of the differing ways the two may use forrevealing a character
(D) inasmuch as there are different ways in the two artforms for character revelation
(E) insofar as the two differ in how to reveal character
13. The opposing opinions expressed were that the schoolshould be torn down and, on the other hand, to keep it asa historical landmark.
(A) were that the school should be torn down and, onthe other hand, to keep it
(B) was that the school should be torn downor kept
(C) were that the school should be torn down and thatit should be kept
(D) were about them tearing the school down andthem keeping the school
(E) were if they should tear the school down andkeeping it
14. Feeling, perhaps, that their votes do not matter, thenumber of young people going to the pollsare becoming increasingly smaller.
(A) the number of young people going to the polls arebecoming increasingly smaller
(B) the number of young people going to the polls isincreasingly smaller
(C) increasingly smaller numbers of youngpeople are going to the polls
(D) young people are going to the polls inincreasingly smaller numbers
(E) young people, who in increasingly smallernumbers are going to the polls
7220
7225
7230
7235
7240
7245
7250
7255
7260
7265
7270
7275
7280
7285
7290
7295
Practice Test 5
SECTION 1 WRITING – ESSAY
Time – 25 minutes
The essay gives you an opportunity to show how effectively you can develop and express ideas. You should, therefore, takecare to develop your point of view, present your ideas logically and clearly, and use language precisely.
Your essay must be written on the lines provided on your answer sheet – you will receive no other paper on which to write.You will have enough space if you write on every line, avoid wide margins, and keep your handwriting to a reasonable size.Remember that people who are not familiar with your handwriting will read what you write. Try to write or print so that whatyou are writing is legible to those readers.
Important Reminders:
A pencil is required for the essay. An essay written in ink will receive a score of zero. Do not write your essay in your test book. You will receive crdit only for what you write on your
answer sheet. An off-topic essay will receive a score of zero. If your essay does not reflect your original and individual work, your test scores may be cancelled.
You have twenty-five minutes to write an essay on the topic assigned below.
Think carefully about the issue presented in the following excerpt and the assignment below.
A colleague of the great scientist James Watson remarked that Watson was always “loungingaround, arguing about problems instead of doing experiments.” He concluded that “There ismore than one way of doing good science.” It was Watson’s form of idleness, the scientistwent on to say, that allowed him to solve “the greatest of all biological problems: the discoveryof the structure of DNA.” It is a point worth remembering in a society overly concerned withefficiency.Adapted from John C. Polanyi, “Understanding Discovery”
Assignment: Do people accomplish more when they are allowed to do things in their own way? Plan and write an essayin which you develop your point of view on this issue. Support your position with reasoning and examplestaken from your reading, studies, experience, or observations.
7300
7305
7310
7315
7320
7325
7330
230
Practice Test 5
SECTION 4 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Some fans feel that sports events are ------- only whenthe competitors are of equal ability, making theoutcome of the game -------.
(A) successful . . assured(B) boring . . questionable(C) dull . . foreseen(D) interesting . . predictable(E) exciting . . uncertain
2. Alfred Schnittke’s musical compositions are -------:phrases are clipped, broken into sections, and splitapart by long rests.
(A) garnished (B) improvisational(C) fragmented (D) cautious (E) uniform
3. The consumer advocate claimed that while drugmanufacturers ------- the supposed advantagesof their proprietary brands, generic versions ofthe same medications are often equally -------.
(A) tout . . efficacious(B) research . . innocuous(C) market . . prohibitive(D) laud . . counterproductive(E) extract . . prescriptive
4. Latoya’s ------- is shown by her ability to be -------:she can see her own faults more clearly than anyoneelse can.
(A) perceptiveness . . self-centered(B) objectivity . . restrictive(C) cynicism . . self-destructive(D) open-mindedness . . complacent(E) insightfulness . . self-critical
5. The bearded dragon lizard is a voracious eater, so -------that it will consume as many insects as possible.
(A) abstemious (B) cannibalistic (C) slovenly(D) insatiable (E) unpalatable
6. Because drummer Tony Williams paved the way forlater jazz-fusion musicians, he is considered a -------of that style.
(A) connoisseur (B) revivalist (C) beneficiary(D) disparager (E) progenitor
7. The politician’s speech to the crowd was composed ofnothing but -------, a bitter railing against the party’sopponents.
(A) digressions (B) diatribes (C) platitudes(D) machinations (E) acclamations
8. Favoring economy of expression in writing, theprofessor urged students toward a ------- ratherthan an ------- prose style.
(A) spare . . ornate(B) terse . . opinionated(C) personal . . academic(D) baroque . . embellished(E) repetitive . . intricate
7335
7340
7345
7350
7355
7360
7365
7370
7375
7380
7385
7390
7395
7400
7405
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
7410
Questions 9-12 are based on the following passages.
Passage 1
Food has always been considered one of the most salientmarkers of cultural traditions. When I was a small child,food was the only thing that helped identify my family asFilipino American. We ate pansit lug-lug (a noodle dish)and my father put patis (salty fish sauce) on everything.However, even this connection lessened as I grew older.As my parents became more acculturated, we ate lesstypically Filipino food. When I was twelve, my mothertook cooking classes and learned to make French andItalian dishes. When I was in high school, we ate chickenmarsala and shrimp fra diablo more often than Filipinodishes like pansit lug-lug.
Passage 2
Jean Anthelme Brillat-Savarin—who in 1825 conf-dently announced, “Tell me what you eat, and I will tellyou who you are”—would have no trouble describingcultural identities of the United States. Our food revealsus as tolerant adventurers who do not feel constrainedby tradition. We “play with our food” far more readilythan we preserve the culinary rules of our varied ancestors.Americans have no single national cuisine. What unitesAmerican eaters culturally is how we eat, not what weeat. As eaters, Americans mingle the culinary traditionsof many regions and cultures. We are multiethnic eaters.
9. Which of the following statements best capturesthe relationship between the two passages?
(A) Passage 1 notes problems for which Passage 2proposes solutions.
(B) Passage 1 presents claims that are debunkedby Passage 2.
(C) Passage 2 furnishes a larger context forthe experiences described in Passage 1.
(D) Passage 2 provides an update of the situationdepicted in Passage 1.
(E) Passage 2 uses material presented in Passage 1to correct a popular misconception.
10. The author of Passage 2 would most likely regardthe mother’s willingness to “make French andItalian dishes” (lines 9-10, Passage 1) as
(A) laughably pretentious(B) understandably conservative(C) typically American(D) a regrettable compromise(E) a surprising attitude
11. The two passages differ in their discussions of foodprimarily in that Passage 1
(A) considers specific dishes eaten by particularpeople, whereas Passage 2 comments ona culture’s general attitude toward eating(B) contrasts the cuisines of different cultures,whereas Passage 2 emphasizes culinarypractices common to all cultures(C) presents an abstract theory of food, whereasPassage 2 offers a historical analysis ofconsumption(D) emphasizes the role of nostalgia in foodpreferences, whereas Passage 2 rejectsthat approach as overly sentimental(E) outlines some popular choices in cuisine,whereas Passage 2 underscores thosethat are more unusual
12. Unlike the author of Passage 2, the author ofPassage 1 makes significant use of
(A) direct quotation(B) sociological analysis(C) hypothetical assumptions(D) historical sources(E) personal experience
235
7415
7420
7425
7430
Questions 13-24 are based on the following passages.
The passages below discuss the possibility of locatingintelligent life on other planets. Passage 1 has beenadapted from a 1999 book on the history of the universe.Passage 2 was excerpted from a 2000 book on thescientific quest for extraterrestrial life.
Passage 1
Generations of science-fiction movies have conditionedus to consider bug-eyed monsters, large-brained intellectualhumanoids, and other rather sophisticated extraterrestrialcreatures as typical examples of life outside Earth. Thereality, however, is that finding any kind of life at all, evensomething as simple as bacteria, would be one of the mostexciting discoveries ever made.
The consensus within the scientific community seems tobe that we eventually will find not only life in other parts ofthe galaxy but also intelligent and technologically advancedlife. I have to say that I disagree. While I believe we willfind other forms of life in other solar systems (if not inour own), I also feel it is extremely unlikely that a largenumber of advanced technological civilizations are outthere, waiting to be discovered. The most succinct supportfor my view comes from Nobel laureate physicistEnrico Fermi, the man who ran the first nuclear reactionever controlled by human beings. Confronted at a 1950luncheon with scientific arguments for the ubiquity oftechnologically advanced civilizations, he supposedlysaid, “So where is everybody?”
This so-called Fermi Paradox embodies a simple logic.Human beings have had modern science only a few hun-dred years, and already we have moved into space. It is nothard to imagine that in a few hundred more years we willbe a starfaring people, colonizing other systems. Fermi’sargument maintains that it is extremely unlikely that manyother civilizations discovered science at exactly the sametime we did. Had they acquired science even a thousandyears earlier than we, they now could be so much moreadvanced that they would already be colonizing our solarsystem.
If, on the other hand, they are a thousand years behindus, we will likely arrive at their home planet before theyeven begin sending us radio signals. Technologicaladvances build upon each other, increasing technologicalabilities faster than most people anticipate. Imagine, forexample, how astounded even a great seventeenth-centuryscientist like Isaac Newton would be by our current globalcommunication system, were he alive today. Where arethose highly developed extraterrestrial civilizations so dearto the hearts of science-fiction writers? Their existence isfar from a foregone conclusion.
Passage 2
Although posed in the most casual of circumstances,the Fermi Paradox has reverberated through the decadesand has at times threatened to destroy the credibilityof those scientists seriously engaged in the Search forExtraterrestrial Intelligence (SETI) research program.
One possible answer to Fermi’s question (“If there areextraterrestrials, where are they?”) is that extraterrestrialshave in fact often visited Earth, and continue to do so.This is the answer of those who believe in the existenceof unidentified flying objects, or UFO’s. But few scien-tists, even those engaged in SETI, take the UFO claimsseriously. “You won’t find anyone around here whobelieves in UFO’s,” says Frank Drake, a well-knownSETI scientist. If one discounts the UFO claims, yet stillbelieves that there are many technological civilizations inthe galaxy, why have they not visited us? Drake’s answeris straightforward: “High-speed interstellar travel is sodemanding of resources and so hazardous that intelligentcivilizations don’t attempt it.” And why should theyattempt it, when radio communication can supply allthe information they might want?
At first glance, Drake’s argument seems very persua-sive. The distances between stars are truly immense.To get from Earth to the nearest star and back, travelingat 99 percent of the speed of light, would take 8 years.And SETI researchers have shown that, to acceleratea spacecraft to such a speed, to bring it to a stop, andto repeat the process in the reverse direction, wouldtake almost unimaginable amounts of energy.
Astronomer Ben Zuckerman challenges Drake’snotion that technological beings would be satisfied withradio communication. “Drake’s implicit assumption isthat the only thing we’re going to care about is intelli-gent life. But what if we have an interest in simplerlife-forms? If you turn the picture around and you havesome advanced extraterrestrials looking at the Earth, untilthe last hundred years there was no evidence of intelligentlife but for billions of years before that they could havededuced that this was a very unusual world and that therewere probably living creatures on it. They would have hadbillions of years to come investigate.” Zuckerman contendsthat the reason extraterrestrials haven’t visited us is that sofew exist.
7435
7440
7445
7450
7455
7460
7465
7470
7475
7480
7485
7490
7495
7500
7505
7510
7515
7520
13. Which statement about the Fermi Paradox is supportedby both passages?
(A) It articulates a crucial question for those interestedin the existence of extraterrestrials.
(B) It clarifies the astronomical conditions requiredto sustain life on other planets.
(C) It reveals the limitations of traditional ideasabout the pace of technological change.
(D) It demonstrates the scientific community’sfascination with the concept of interstellartravel.
(E) It suggests that advanced extraterrestrialcivilizations may be uninterested in ourculture.
14. Which statement best describes a significant differencebetween the two passages?
(A) Passage 1 analyzes a literary form, whilePassage 2 argues that literature has littlebearing on science.
(B) Passage 1 presents an argument, while Passage 2surveys current opinion in a debate.
(C) Passage 1 concludes by rejecting the FermiParadox, while Passage 2 opens byembracing it.
(D) Passage 1 describes a phenomenon, whilePassage 2 details a belief system that wouldreject such a phenomenon.
(E) Passage 1 defends a viewpoint, while Passage 2questions that viewpoint’s place in scientificresearch.
15. The author of Passage 1 mentions “monsters,”“humanoids,” and “creatures” (lines 2-4)primarily to
(A) question the literary value of science fiction(B) contrast fictional notions with a scientific
perspective(C) offer examples of the human fear of the unknown(D) criticize science fiction for being unduly alarmist(E) suggest that scientific research has been influ-enced by science fiction
16. In line 17, “ran” most nearly means
(A) fled(B) accumulated(C) traversed(D) managed(E) incurred
17. Passage 1 suggests that the Fermi Paradox dependsmost directly on which assumption?
(A) Extraterrestrial civilizations may not wish to bediscovered by human beings.
(B) Extraterrestrial civilizations would most likelyhave discovered technology at about the sametime human beings discovered it.
(C) Extraterrestrial technology would develop atroughly the same rate as human technology.
(D) Extraterrestrial civilizations would inevitablyuse technology for aggressive ends.
(E) Science is a more powerful form of humanknowledge than are art and literature.
18. The claim made in Passage 1 that a “consensus”exists (lines 8-11) would most likely be interpretedby the author of Passage 2 as
(A) evidence of compromise in the scientificcommunity
(B) an attack on SETI researchers(C) support for Fermi’s analysis(D) a revelation of an unexpected truth(E) an oversimplification of a complex debate
19. The author of Passage 1 mentions Isaac Newton(lines 37-40) in order to
(A) emphasize the rapid rate of technologicalinnovation
(B) acknowledge the impact of a profound thinker(C) criticize the inflexibility of Newton’s
contemporaries(D) speculate about Newton’s influence on current
research(E) highlight the value of scientific curiosity
20. In lines 44-48, the author of Passage 2 indicates thatthe Fermi Paradox has been
(A) thoroughly misunderstood(B) surprisingly influential(C) overwhelmingly perplexing(D) intermittently popular(E) frequently misquoted
7525
7530
7535
7540
7545
7550
7555
7560
7565
7570
7575
7580
7585
7590
7595
7600
7605
7610
7615
7620
7625
240
21. How would Frank Drake (line 56, Passage 2) mostlikely respond to the statement by the author ofPassage 1 about humans “colonizing other systems”(line 26) ?
(A) The means to accomplish such a project may bebeyond our reach.
(B) Interstellar colonization is as morally problematicas was colonization on Earth.
(C) We would do better to study indigenous life-formsrather than search for extraterrestrial creatures.
(D) Humans would be wise to consider that theythemselves are subject to colonization.
(E) Funding for such an undertaking would posea thorny political issue for any government.
22. In line 57, “claims” most nearly means
(A) demands(B) assertions(C) rights(D) territories(E) compensations
23. In line 63, “radio communication” is cited as a
(A) complex interaction(B) technological relic(C) common occurrence(D) practical alternative(E) dramatic advance
24. Both the author of Passage 1 and Ben Zuckerman(line 73, Passage 2) imply that researchers seeking lifeon another planet should focus on which of thefollowing?
(A) Seasonal variations in color due to plant life(B) Evidence of the most basic forms of life(C) Signs of artificially created structures(D) Signals that might be radio communications(E) Changes in geological surface features
7630
7635
7640
7645
7650
7655
7660
7665
7670
7675
7680
7685
7690
7695
7700
7705
7710
SECTION 5 WRITING
Time - 25 minutes
35 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. The library is older than it but still just as beautiful asthe courthouse.
(A) older than it but still just as beautiful as thecourthouse
(B) older and it is just as beautiful as the courthouse(C) older than the courthouse; it is just as beautiful as it(D) older than the courthouse but just as beautiful(E) just as beautiful as the courthouse and it is older
than it
2. Winslow Homer, one of America’s foremost artists,spent his last 27 years and painted on the scenic Mainecoast.
(A) spent his last 27 years and painted(B) spent his last 27 years having painted(C) spent his last 27 years painting(D) having spent his last 27 years doing his painting(E) spending his last 27 years painting
3. Researchers are experimenting with various techniquesfor preventing the accumulation in water of high levelsof nitrogen, which can kill plants and animals.
(A) nitrogen, which can kill plants and animals(B) nitrogen; plants and animals can be killed(C) nitrogen, that is what can kill plants and animals(D) nitrogen, they could kill plants and animals(E) nitrogen, and they can kill plants and animals
4. When the news spread how new goldfields werediscovered in Nome, Alaska, thousands abandonedDawson, the site of the previous gold rush.
(A) how new goldfields were discovered(B) how there was discovery of new goldfields(C) about new goldfields, which they discovered(D) about new goldfields, and they were discovered(E) about new goldfields that had been discovered
5. When the Berlin Wall, long a symbol of the Cold War,began to be torn down in 1989, five million peoplewent to Berlin to celebrate that.
(A) to celebrate that(B) for its celebration(C) to celebrate(D) in celebration of that(E) in celebrating
7715
7720
7725
7730
7735
7740
7745
7750
7755
7760
7765
7770
7775
6. To complete the music program, a student must presentone vocal performance, one instrumental performance,and composing one original work.
(A) and composing one original work(B) and one original composition(C) with one original composition(D) and to compose one original work(E) as well as the student’s original composition
7. Zookeepers have expanded one’s definition of care toinclude concern for the animal’s mental state as well asfor its physical well-being.
(A) have expanded one’s definition of care to include(B) have expanded one’s definition of care, including(C) expand their definition of care, they include(D) expanding the definition of care to include(E) have expanded their definition of care to include
8. The time and the place for such a large event is subjectto approving from the mayor’s office.
(A) The time and the place for such a large event issubject to approving from the mayor’s office.(B) For such a large event, the time and the place aresubject to the mayor’s office’s approving them.(C) The time and the place for such a large event aresubject to the approval of the mayor’s office.(D) The time and place for such a large event aresubject to be approved by the office of themayor.(E) Subject to the approval of the mayor’s office arethe time and place for such a large event takingplace.
9. New Zealand’s Kaikoura Peninsula, a ruggedlybeautiful spit of land, borders an undersea canyon thatis home to the sperm whale and the giant squid.
(A) borders an undersea canyon that is(B) bordering an undersea canyon,(C) and it borders an undersea canyon, which is(D) which borders an undersea canyon,(E) is the border of an undersea canyon, being
10. In similarity with some other great works, the enduringhorror tale Frankenstein was first publishedanonymously; its author, Mary Shelley, wrote thenovel when she was not quite nineteen years old.
(A) In similarity with(B) As(C) Like what happened with(D) Like the case with(E) Like
11. The book is useful because it offers not just philosophyand theory but also tells you what and how tolive every day.
(A) but also tells you what and how to live every day(B) but also it gives ways of everyday living(C) but also advice for everyday living(D) but also it gives practical advice for everyday life(E) and also tells you what to do and how to liveevery day
245
7780
7785
7790
7795
7800
7805
7810
7815
7820
7825
7830
7835
7840
7845
7850
7855
7860
7865
7870
The following sentences test your ability to recognizegrammar and usage errors. Each sentence contains eithera single error or no error at all. No sentence contains morethan one error. The error, if there is one, is underlinedand lettered. If the sentence contains an error, select theone underlined part that must be changed to make thesentence correct. If the sentence is correct, select choice E.In choosing answers, follow the requirements of standardwritten English.
EXAMPLE:
The other delegates and him immediately A B Caccepted the resolution drafted by the Dneutral states. No error
E
12. The country found that its economy was growing
A
more stronger, with an improved outlook and more
B C
opportunities for training and employment. No error
D E
13. The iris, the colored part of the eye, contains delicate
A
patterns that are unique to each person, offering a
B C
powerful means of identification. No error
D E
14. The newly elected Prime Minister, to the dismay
A B
of opponents from other parties, have argued for
C
the strict regulation of campaign financing. No error
D E
15. Studies have suggested that eating nuts—almonds
A
in particular—might help to lower blood cholesterol
B
levels in humans and reducing the risk of heart disease
C
by protecting the blood vessels. No error
D E
16. In English literature James Boswell is the prime
A
example of a biographer who, by ensuring the
B
immortality of another author, has achieved
C
immortality for himself . No error
D E
17. Because the garden was untended , the windows
A
had no shutters, and the lawn overrun by weeds,
B C
people passing by the old house assumed that
D
it was unoccupied. No error
E
7875
7880
7885
7890
7895
7900
7905
7910
7915
7920
7925
7930
7935
7940
18. Until recently, most people entering politics feel that
A B
loss of privacy was a fair price to pay for the chance
C D
to participate in policy making. No error
E
19. Only by tapping their last reserves of energy were the
A B
team members able to salvage what was beginning
C D
to look like a lost cause. No error
E
20. When Doris Lessing published The Golden Notebook
in 1962, it instantly established herself as one of
A B C
the most important literary voices of her generation.
D
No error
E
21. Not many authors have described the effects
A B
of environmental pollution as effective as
C
Rachel Carson, whose work is still a model for
D
nature writers. No error
E
22. It was a Chinese American grower who finally
A
succeeded with adapting the now familiar
B C
orange tree to the American climate. No error
D E
23. The survey indicated that workers in the United States
hope that his or her wages will keep pace with
A B C
the rising cost of living. No error
D E
24. In Angkor, Cambodia’s ancient city, a clever
A
designed reservoir, five miles long and one mile wide,
supplied fish and helped farmers to produce
B C D
three crops of rice annually. No error
E
25. Last summer, when Mary’s aunt and uncle
flew from Turkey to visit their relatives and tour
A B
the United States, Mary invited Sandhya and I to
C
her house to meet them. No error
D E
7945
7950
7955
7960
7965
7970
7975
7980
7985
7990
7995
8000
8005
8010
8015
8020
8025
250
26. Ongoing research by several scientists suggest that
A B
regular periods of meditation reduce blood pressure
C
and are likely to contribute to other improvements
D
in health. No error
E
27. Because the American Indian rodeo includes games
and exhibitions developed as early as the seventeenth
A
century, they predate by a few hundred years
B C
the form of rodeo now seen on television. No error
D E
28. Five years in the writing , her new book is
A
both a response to her critics’ mistrust with
B C
her earlier findings and an elaboration of her
D
original thesis. No error
E
29. Despite its cultural importance, the Daily Gazette
A
lost 70 percent of its subscribers since 1920 and,
B
by 1955, was losing as much as $200,000 a year.
C D
No error
E
Directions: The following passage is an early draft of anessay. Some parts of the passage need to be rewritten.
Read the passage and select the best answers for thequestions that follow. Some questions are about particularsentences or parts of sentences and ask you to improvesentence structure or word choice. Other questions ask youto consider organization and development. In choosinganswers, follow the requirements of standard written English.
Questions 30-35 are based on the following passage.
(1) No one owns Antarctica. (2) The nations ofthe world agreed—some of them reluctantly—that allcountries would share the continent for the purposes ofscientific research. (3) Governed by the Antarctic Treaty,written in 1959 and adopted in 1961, which has beensigned by 27 countries. (4) Another 17 countries haveagreed to abide by the treaty in order to participate inresearch being done in Antarctica.
(5) In Antarctica, relations among the researchers andtheir countries are both simpler and more complicated thanin the rest of the world. (6) Relations are simpler becauseeach country has only a few scientists on this isolatedcontinent. (7) Treaty clauses assure that the research thereis nonmilitary. (8) On the other hand, when conflicts doarise, there is no clear process for dealing with them.(9) Decisions that can make or break the preservationof Antarctica’s unique environment and its scientificopportunities depend on a political system designed tohave nobody in command.
(10) Clear decision making has become a more urgentchallenge as more tourists are attracted to Antarctica.(11) Scientists living on Antarctica were not always ascareful to preserve the pristine environment as they arenow. (12) Tour operators are working with treaty membersto devise regulations, and there are plans to assess theenvironmental impacts of tours. (13) But regulationsand assessment plans may prove difficult to settle onand enforce in a place where jurisdiction is unclear.
30. What must be done to sentence 3 ?
(A) Combine it with sentence 2, putting a commaafter “research”.
(B) Begin it with the words “Antarctica is”.(C) Replace the comma after “1961” with a
semicolon.(D) Place the words “it was” before “written”.(E) Change “1961, which” to “1961. It”.
8030
8035
8040
8045
8050
8055
8060
8065
8070
8075
8080
8085
8090
8095
8100
8105
8110
8115
8120
31. What should be done with sentence 7 ?
(A) Change “assure” to “make sure”.(B) Change “Treaty clauses” to “The clauses agreed
to by the diverse countries represented there”.(C) Place sentence 7 before sentence 6.(D) Combine sentence 7 with sentence 6 by changing
the period after “continent” to a comma.(E) Combine sentence 7 with sentence 6 by changing
“continent. Treaty” to “continent and alsobecause treaty”.
32. In context, which is the best revision of the underlinedportion of sentence 9 (reproduced below) ?
Decisions that can make or break the preservationof Antarctica’s unique environment andits scientific opportunities depend on a political systemdesigned to have nobody in command.
(A) create or destroy(B) support or dispute(C) be determined by(D) be critical to(E) be an adjustment to
33. The purpose of the second paragraph is to
(A) present a situation that has contradictory elements(B) offer a solution to a problem discussed in the first
paragraph(C) present an argument and its final resolution(D) examine a theory in light of new discoveries(E) discuss a theory that will be refuted in the third
paragraph
34. Which sentence should be deleted?
(A) 1(B) 2(C) 11(D) 12(E) 13
35. The third paragraph would be improved if which of thefollowing sentences were added?
(A) Scientists collect ice cores by driving a hollowtube deep into the miles-thick ice sheets.
(B) If the West Antarctic ice sheet melted,global seas would rise by 15 to 20 feet.
(C) It is the driest place in the world, yet it contains70 percent of Earth’s freshwater.
(D) One cruise ship encountered 30-foot waves all theway across the Drake Passage.
(E) Last year, more than 10,000 tourists visitedAntarctica, bringing soiled boots, climbing gear,and trash to many locations.
8125
8130
8135
8140
8145
8150
8155
8160
8165
8170
8175
8180
8185
8190
8195
8200
8205
SECTION 7 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Black Americans in Flight, a mural honoring severalaviation pioneers, also ------- the 1992 spaceflight ofastronaut Mae Jemison.
(A) discerns (B) introduces (C) approximates(D) commemorates (E) asserts
2. The new antifungal agent has such ------- uses, fromtreating Dutch elm disease to rescuing water-damagedworks of art from molds, that it is considered one ofthe more ------- antibiotics.
(A) disturbing . . explicit(B) innovative . . precipitous(C) mysterious . . recognized(D) varied . . versatile(E) similar . . discriminating
3. The child had a tendency toward aggressive behavior,a ------- fighting rather than resolving differencesamicably.
(A) propensity for (B) confusion about(C) disregard of (D) hostility toward(E) compunction about
4. Physical exercise often has a ------- effect, releasingemotional tension and refreshing the spirit.
(A) pejorative (B) debilitating (C) cathartic(D) retentive (E) tenacious
5. Because rap and hip-hop offer such ------- commentaryon contemporary issues, they are often said to besharp-edged musical genres.
(A) nebulous (B) trenchant (C) circumspect(D) prosaic (E) benign
255
8210
8215
8220
8225
8230
8235
8240
8245
8250
8255
8260
8265
8270
Each passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or impliedin the passages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
8275
Questions 6-7 are based on the following passage.
“Mechanical pencils rule,” my fifteen-year-oldgrandniece, Genevieve, declared when I invited her tobe her generation’s voice on school supplies. “Nobodysharpens anymore.” Then, continuing with a fashionmaven’s hyperbole and arbitrary imperatives, she gavea passionate disquisition on types of clickers, new grips,smaller lead sizes, and other niceties of pencil selection.As she consigned the yellow-painted wooden pencil tothe wastebasket of history, I felt a rush of nostalgia forthe perfumed sharpener shavings of my youth.
6. In lines 4-5, the author refers to a “fashion maven’s”tone primarily in order to
(A) imply that Genevieve has only a superficialappreciation of mechanical pencils
(B) suggest that Genevieve is excessively concernedabout her clothing
(C) illustrate some of the exaggerated claims madeby mechanical pencil manufacturers
(D) emphasize the unpredictability of trends in consumertastes
(E) indicate that Genevieve expresses her opinionswith authority and flair
7. The author mentions “sharpener shavings” (line 10)in order to portray a mood of
(A) unrestrained joy(B) sentimental reminiscence(C) bitter disappointment(D) cautious optimism(E) dark foreboding
Questions 8-9 are based on the following passage.
Black holes are the most efficient engines of destructionknown to humanity. Their intense gravity is a one-way
ticket to oblivion, and material spiraling into them canheat up to millions of degrees and glow brightly. Yet, theyare not all-powerful. Even supermassive black holes areminuscule by cosmic standards. They typically account forless than one percent of their galaxy’s mass. Accordingly,astronomers long assumed that supermassive holes, letalone their smaller cousins, would have little effect beyondtheir immediate neighborhoods. So it has come as a sur-prise over the past decade that black hole activity is closelyintertwined with star formation occurring farther out in thegalaxy.
8. Which best describes the function of the statementin lines 20-23 (“So it . . . galaxy”) ?
(A) It summarizes the points made in the firstfour lines of the passage.
(B) It provides support for the argument assertedin the preceding statement.
(C) It introduces a new view of informationpresented earlier in the passage.
(D) It challenges recent scientific findings.(E) It offers examples to support a theory.
9. Which of the following most resembles the relationshipbetween “black hole activity” and “star formation”(lines 21-22) as described in the passage?
(A) A volcanic eruption on one continent resultsin higher rainfall totals on another continent.
(B) Industrial emissions in one region lead to anincrease in airborne pollutants in adjacentregions.
(C) A drought in a wilderness area causes asignificant loss of vegetation in that area.
(D) Decreased oil production in one country resultsin higher gas prices in oil-dependent countries.
(E) Overfishing in a gulf leads to an increase inthe population of smaller aquatic organisms.
8280
8285
8290
8295
8300
260
Questions 10-15 are based on the following passage.
The following passage is an excerpt from a 1909 novel.Georgia, the main character, is a reporter in an otherwiseall-male newsroom.
Georgia was to be married. It was the week beforeChristmas, and on the last day of the year she wouldbecome Mrs. Joseph Tank. She had told Joe that ifthey were to be married at all they might as well get itover with this year, and still there was no need of beingmarried any earlier in the year than was necessary. Sheassured him that she married him simply because she wastired of having paper bags waved before her eyes every-where she went and she thought if she were once officiallyssociated with him people would not flaunt his idiosyn-crasies at her that way. And then Ernestine, her best friend,approved of getting married, and Ernestine’s ideas wereusually good. To all of which Joe responded that shecertainly had a splendid head to figure it out that way.Joe said that to his mind reasons for doing things weren’tvery important anyhow; it was doing them that counted.Yesterday had been her last day on the paper. She hadfelt queer about that thing of taking her last assignment,though it was hard to reach just the proper state, for thelast story related to pork-packers, and pork-packing isnot a setting favorable to sentimental regrets. It was justlike the newspaper business not even to allow one a littlesentimental harrowing over one’s exodus from it. But thetime for gentle melancholy came later on when she wassorting her things at her desk just before leaving, andwas wondering what girl would have that old desk—ifthey cared to risk another girl, and whether the other poorgirl would slave through the years she should have beenfrivolous, only to have some man step in at the end andinduce her to surrender the things she had gained throughsacrifice and toil.
As she wrote a final letter on her typewriter—she didhate letting the old machine go—Georgia did considerablephilosophizing about the irony of working for things onlyto the end of giving them up. She had waded through snow-drifts and been drenched in pouring rains, she had beenfrozen with the cold and prostrated with the heat, she hadbeen blown about by Chicago wind until it was strangethere was any of her left in one piece, she had had frontdoors—yes, and back doors too—slammed in her face,she had been the butt of the alleged wit of menials andhirelings, she had been patronized by vapid women asthe poor girl who must make her living some way, shehad been roasted by—but never mind—she had hada beat* or two! And now she was to wind it all up bymarrying Joseph Tank, who had made a great deal of
money out of the manufacture of paper bags. This fromher—who had always believed she would end her daysin New York, or perhaps write a realistic novel exposingsome mighty evil!
* the area regularly covered by a reporter
10. Based on information presented in the passage, whichbest describes what Georgia was “tired of ” (line 8) ?
(A) Being forced to earn a living(B) Being teased about Joseph Tank(C) Being considered a hack writer by some
of her colleagues(D) Being betrayed by her supposed friends(E) Being the only woman in the newsroom
11. The second paragraph suggests that Georgia believesthe “proper state” (line 19) would be one of
(A) excitement(B) wistfulness(C) amusement(D) annoyance(E) relief
12. In line 27, “poor” most nearly means
(A) pitiable(B) indigent(C) inferior(D) humble(E) petty
13. Which most resembles the “irony” mentionedin line 34 ?
(A) A worker moving to a distant state to takea job, only to be fired without warning
(B) An executive making an important decision,only to regret it later
(C) An athlete earning a starting position ona good team, only to quit in midseason
(D) A student studying for a major exam, onlyto learn that it has been postponed
(E) A person purchasing an expensive umbrella,only to lose it on the first rainy day
8305
8310
8315
8320
8325
8330
8335
8340
8345
8350
14. The description in lines 35-45 (“She . . . two!”)primarily serves to
(A) suggest that Georgia envied those womenwho did not have to work
(B) imply that Georgia would be unlikely everto consider working as a reporter again
(C) indicate the role that weather plays in theeveryday life of a reporter
(D) exaggerate Georgia’s reluctance to relinquishher job
(E) how the adversities Georgia had to overcomeas a reporter
15. In context, the phrase “This from her” (lines 47-48)helps to suggest that a
(A) specific feeling is quite heartfelt(B) stated viewpoint is highly personal(C) certain decision is out of character(D) particular behavior is extremely upsetting(E) given attitude is unsurprising
8355
8360
8365
8370
8375
8380
8385
8390
8395
8400
8405
8410
8415
8420
8425
Questions 16-24 are based on the following passage.
The following passage is adapted from a book abouttelevision and popular culture.
Ridiculing television, and warning about its inherentevils, is nothing new. It has been that way since themedium was invented, and television hasn’t exactlybeen lavished with respect as the decades have passed.I suspect, though, that a lot of the fear and loathingdirected at television comes out of a time-honored,reflexive overreaction to the dominant medium of themoment. For the past several decades, television hasbeen blamed for corrupting our youth and excitingour adults, distorting reality, and basically being abig, perhaps dangerous, waste of time. Before TV,radio and film were accused of the same things. Andlong before that—in fact, some 2,500 years earlier—philosophers were arguing that poetry and dramashould be excluded from any ideal city on much thesame grounds.
In Book 10 of the Republic, Plato (428-348 B.C.)attacks epic poet Homer (c. 850 B.C.) and the tragedianson several grounds, all of which have a familiarring. “Their productions are appearances and not realities,”he gripes. “Drawing, and in fact all imitation . . . [is] quiteremoved from the truth.” The audience, as well as the artform, troubled Plato, whose remarks are colored by animplied disdain for the popularity of public performances.The “common people,” as Plato so charitably calls them,are drawn to “peevish and diverse” characters—such asOdysseus and other heroes in the Iliad and the Odyssey—who (to Plato, anyway) engage in such questionabledisplays of emotion as “spinning out a long melancholylamentation” or “disfiguring themselves in grief.” ToPlato, baring such intimate sorrows is not to be condoned.(Clearly, he would have given thumbs down to the centralcharacters of Shakespeare’s Hamlet and Macbeth.) “If youreceive the pleasure-seasoned Muse1 of song and epic,”Plato warns, “pleasure and pain will be kings in your city,instead of law.” Finally, Plato sums up his anti-arts argu-ment with the cold, sweeping pronouncement that “poetryis not to be taken seriously.”
One academic who has studied and written extensivelyabout both Plato and television suggests that Plato, ratherthan being anti-arts, was merely an elitist. Plato wantedto ban poetry readings and live theater, the argumentgoes, because, being free and accessible and raucous andextremely popular, they were the mass entertainmentof that era. “If, instead of ‘tragedy’ and ‘poetry,’ and‘Homer’ and ‘Aeschylus,’2 you read ‘mass entertainment’or ‘popular media,’ you’ll recognize Plato’s arguments asthe ancestor of all the reasons we have today for beingsuspicious of television.”
To wit: poetry, by which Plato means drama, confusesus between appearance and reality. The action it presents
is too extreme and violent. Most important, it’s a corrupt-ing influence, perverting its audience by bombarding itwith inferior characters and vulgar subjects—and con-stituting, in Plato’s own words, “a harm to the mind ofits audience.”
If Plato’s Republic had become reality, it would havebeen a republic with a lot of empty libraries, theaters, andmuseums—if, indeed, those repositories of the arts wouldhave survived at all. Plato’s personal utopia never came topass—but throughout the centuries, wherever and when-ever a new medium of artistic expression attracted a lotof people, someone has been ready, waiting, and eager toattack its content and fear its impact.
1 The Muses inspired poetry and song in Greek mythology.2 Aeschylus (525-456 B.C.) was a Greek tragic dramatist.
16. The opening paragraph primarily serves to
(A) criticize the way television distorts the truth(B) examine the evolution of television as a medium(C) place contemporary criticism of television in a
historical context(D) directly compare television and drama as art
forms(E) explain why television, radio, and drama appeal
to the masses
17. Which of the following television shows wouldbe LEAST vulnerable to the criticism expressedin lines 8-11 (“For . . . time”) ?
(A) A melodrama in which police detectives attemptto solve crimes
(B) A soap opera depicting interpersonal conflicts ina fictional law firm
(C) A comedy whose primary characters aresupernatural
(D) A documentary on the state of education inthe nation
(E) A talk show that encourages people to confronteach other in front of a studio audience
18. In line 26, “drawn” most nearly means
(A) brought(B) depicted(C) selected(D) attracted(E) shaped
265
8430
8435
8440
8445
8450
8455
8460
8465
8470
8475
8480
8485
19. Which of the following best characterizes Plato’s viewof the heroes mentioned in line 27 ?
(A) Admiration(B) Curiosity(C) Distrust(D) Disappointment(E) Contempt
20. The “academic” (line 39) indicates that Plato wasprimarily characterized by his
(A) insight(B) artistry(C) cynicism(D) irreverence(E) snobbishness
21. The primary purpose of the statements in lines 39-45(“One . . . that era”) is to
(A) provide an interpretation of a viewpointdescribed in the previous paragraph
(B) show how Plato’s view of politics shouldbe understood in today’s terms
(C) put divergent interpretations of Plato intohistorical perspective
(D) account for the appeal of Plato’s writings(E) signal a digression in the passage
22. The fourth paragraph (lines 50-56) indicates thatPlato’s principal objection to “poetry” (line 50)was its
(A) confusing language(B) widespread popularity(C) depiction of turbulent events(D) influence on people’s morals(E) misrepresentation of historical figures
23. The author of the passage would probably agree withwhich of the following statements about the “utopia”referred to in line 60 ?
(A) It would have encouraged new artistic ventures.(B) It would have stifled human creativity.(C) It is an ideal that we should continue to work
towards.(D) It may come to pass because of the popularity
of television.(E) It was a notion rejected by Greek philosophers.
24. The comment about “a new medium of artisticexpression” (line 62) primarily suggests that
(A) the author holds a fatalistic view of thefuture for artistic expression
(B) certain societies in the past have beenslow to accept new art forms
(C) people often disguise their true feelingswhen it comes to art
(D) the popular response to a new art formwill often overcome opposition to it
(E) a popular new art form will alwaysreceive some form of negative response
8490
8495
8500
8505
8510
8515
8520
8525
8530
8535
8540
8545
8550
8555
8560
8565
8570
8575
8580
8585
SECTION 8 CRITICAL READING
Time – 20 minutes
19 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. As a child, Mary ------- her stringent upbringing;however, as she grew older she began to appreciateher grandmother’s strict -------.
(A) tolerated . . autonomy(B) despised . . discipline(C) embraced . . authority(D) disavowed . . abstinence(E) loathed . . liberality
2. His mouth stinging and burning, Virgil hurried to thekitchen for water to wash away the dish’s ------- taste.
(A) earthy (B) exotic (C) cloying(D) acrid (E) succulent
3. Since other seabirds customarily nest in colonies onocean cliffs and islands, the marbled murrelet’s -------nesting in forests many miles from the sea must beconsidered -------.
(A) ambivalence about . . hypothetical(B) indifference to . . bold(C) insistence upon . . evident(D) aversion to . . dangerous(E) predilection for . . atypical
4. The cause of Mozart’s ------- is a long-standingmedical -------: over the years, physicians havesuggested more than 100 possibilities, includingpoisoning, malnutrition, kidney disease, andheart failure.
(A) mortality . . phenomenon(B) bereavement . . controversy(C) genius . . enigma(D) demise . . mystery(E) death . . trial
5. At first the children were -------, but as the morningprogressed they began to laugh and talk eagerly.
(A) ostentatious (B) myopic (C) solicitous(D) puerile (E) reticent
6. Oren missed the play’s overarching significance,focusing instead on details so minor that they wouldbest be described as -------.
(A) pragmatic (B) indelible (C) moribund(D) picayune (E) impervious
8590
8595
8600
8605
8610
8615
8620
8625
8630
8635
8640
8645
8650
8655
8660
270
The passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or impliedin the passage and in any introductory material that may be provided.
8665
Questions 7-19 are based on the following passage.
The following passage is from a 1979 essay by a NativeAmerican writer.
An understanding of any national literature dependsvery much on an awareness of the larger cultural context.Without some knowledge of language, of history, ofinflection, of the position of the storyteller within thegroup, without a hint of the social roles played by malesand females in the culture, without a sense of the society’shumor or priorities—without such knowledge, how canwe, as reader or listener, penetrate to the core of meaningin an expression of art?
The difficulty of gaining access to the literature of adifferent culture may be illustrated by an exemplary folktale(in translation) from the Tanaina (Athabaskan) cultureof south-central Alaska. It would typically be told to ageneral audience within the society, including the full rangeof ages from young children to grandparents; it would berecounted with gesticulation and exaggeration by a perfor-mance specialist. It would be expected to have differentmeanings to the various categories of listeners— instructive,entertaining, reinforcing, or all three. Here is a brief versionof the story:
“Once upon a time there was a porcupine woman whodecided to do some hunting on the far side of the river. Shewent to the bank, where she met a beaver.
‘Hello,’ she said to him. ‘I need to do some hunting overthere. Will you ride me across on your back?’
‘I’d be glad to,’ replied the beaver. ‘Hop on.’So the porcupine woman climbed on his back, and he
started swimming for the other side. When he had almostmade it, the porcupine woman said, ‘Oh my! I’ve forgottento bring my sack. I’ll need to go back to the other bank andget it.’
‘All right,’ said the beaver, and swam back. He waspanting while the porcupine woman went to get her sack.
‘Okay,’ she said. ‘Let’s go.’ So they started acrossagain. The beaver was swimming much more slowly. Whenthey had practically reached the other side, she said, ‘Ohmy! I’ve forgotten to bring my needle. We’ll have to goback and get it.’
This time the beaver didn’t say anything—he didn’thave enough breath! But he turned around and pulled themback to the shore and nearly passed out while she got herneedle.
‘Hurry up, now,’ the porcupine woman said as sheclimbed back on his back. He could hardly keep his noseabove water, but he had almost made it to the far bankagain when she said, ‘Oh my! I’ve forgotten my staff.
We’ll have to . . . .’Before she had finished her sentence the beaver had
flipped over in the water and dragged himself onto thebank, where he lay half dead. The porcupine womanmanaged to make the shore too, and climbed up onto a bearpath. When she had caught her breath, she turned on thebeaver and quilled him to death.”
The Tanaina live in an environment that could euphe-mistically be described as “difficult.” Survival, especiallyin the wild, is always precarious. Further, they were, in theprecontact period, a nonliterate people. Oral communica-tion was therefore the method of cultural transmission,legal understanding, and meaningful communication. It isalso necessary to know that a “staff,” as mentioned in thestory, functions as both a walking stick and a weapon, andthat in the Tanaina symbol system, porcupines weresupposed to be rather ponderous, dull-witted creatures, andbeavers were thought to be energetic and industrious butoverly spontaneous and erratic.
For the reader armed with these data, the story becomesmore accessible as a lesson in contract law, with severaladditional minor themes. A culturally attuned listenerwould notice, for instance, that when the porcupine womanproposed passage to the beaver, he agreed without anystipulations or clarifications of the terms. He gave abasically open-ended agreement—made a contract—andhence the porcupine woman was perfectly within her rightsboth in demanding that he return three times and in quillinghim to death when he reneged.
The story is not, however, without its moral for the por-cupine women of this world. Her stated aim is to gohunting, and yet she sets out without the three essentials ofthat endeavor: a sack in which to carry home her game, aneedle with which to sew up the intestines, and, mostimportant, an implement with which to hunt and defendherself. True, she had an open-ended contract, but wheredoes she wind up at the conclusion of the story? Sitting,exhausted, quills used up, weaponless, and not only on thewrong side of the river from her home but on a bear path!The hunter is about to become the hunted, and all becauseof her own improvidence.
8670
8675
8680
8685
8690
8695
8700
8705
8710
8715
8720
8725
8730
8735
8740
8745
8750
7. In the opening paragraph, the author assumes that the“meaning” (line 8) is
(A) culturally determined(B) intensely personal(C) essentially moralistic(D) permanently inscrutable(E) uniquely artistic
8. In the context of the passage, which “expression of art”(line 9) would be the most difficult to interpret?
(A) A contemporary play written by a prolific play-wright
(B) A fable from a nonliterate society with whichanthropologists are very familiar
(C) A single text produced by a previously unknownsociety
(D) A sitcom from the early days of television(E) A single myth from an ancient culture with a well-
documented mythological structure
9. How does the author respond to the question posed inlines 3-9 ?
(A) By proposing an innovative strategy(B) By confirming the futility of such analysis(C) By describing a personal experience with theproblem(D) By illustrating his point within a particular context(E) By documenting a traditional approach to the
problem
10. The author discusses Tanaina culture from theperspective of
(A) a concerned parent(B) a bewildered visitor(C) a performance artist(D) an informed outsider(E) an indignant reader
11. The sentence in which “difficult” appears (lines 54-55)indicates that the author considers the word to be
(A) an exaggeration(B) an estimate(C) an understatement(D) a contradiction(E) a preconception
12. In relation to the passage, the statements in lines 59-65serve a function most similar to which of the followingitems?
(A) A menu in a restaurant(B) The key or legend to a map(C) A department store directory(D) The outline of a term paper(E) An illustration of a fairytale
13. The author’s analysis of the folktale offers whichinsight into Tanaina beliefs?
(A) A fanciful story is most suitable for an audienceof children.
(B) A verbal exchange can establish a bindingcontract.
(C) A person who behaves impulsively is most oftensincere.
(D) A shared task should be divided fairly betweentwo people.
(E) A painstaking plan may nonetheless fail toanticipate all problems.
14. The “porcupine women of this world” (lines 76-77) arebest described as people who
(A) plan inadequately for their own needs(B) postpone necessary work in favor of leisure(C) depend heavily upon help from their close friends(D) return repeatedly to their favorite places(E) flee quickly from any laborious task
15. The final paragraph (lines 76-87) suggests that the bearpath mentioned in lines 51-52 is significant because it
(A) foreshadows the arrival of a benevolent characterfrom Tanaina folklore
(B) suggests an alarming alternative to crossingthe river
(C) marks the boundary of the beaver’s naturalsurroundings
(D) explains the porcupine woman’s fear ofunfamiliar territory
(E) poses a new peril for the porcupine woman
275
8755
8760
8765
8770
8775
8780
8785
8790
8795
8800
8805
8810
8815
8820
8825
8830
8835
8840
8845
8850
8855
16. In lines 83-87, the description of the porcupine womanemphasizes the discrepancy between her
(A) social position and her private feelings(B) physical wealth and her moral poverty(C) hostile action and her ultimate gratitude(D) original goal and her actual situation(E) grandiose ambition and her real needs
17. As a commentary on legal relations, this folktale is bestdescribed as
(A) an example of traditional practices(B) an outline for social behavior(C) a warning about ill-conceived assent(D) a criticism of obsolete customs(E) parody of actual situations
18. The author’s attitude toward the Tanaina folktale isbest described as
(A) excitement at an unexpected discovery(B) admiration of the storyteller’s performance(C) appreciation of the folktale as a means of commu-
nicating values(D) enthusiasm for the Tanaina culture’s concept of
legality(E) enjoyment of the comical aspects of the folktale
19. Which statement is most consistent with the author’sargument?
(A) Translating a literary text requires formal linguistictraining.
(B) Tales transmitted by a nonliterate society eludetranscription in later eras.
(C) Listening to a skilled storyteller is more instruct-tive than entertaining.
(D) Simple enjoyment of a tale is incompatible withscholarly analysis.
(E) To read a text is not necessarily to understand it.
8860
8865
8870
8875
8880
8885
8890
8895
8900
8905
8910
8915
8920
8925
8930
8935
8940
8945
SECTION 10 WRITING
Time – 10 minutes
14 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. The Amazon River carries more water than the watercarried in any of the world’s other rivers.
(A) the water carried in any of the world’s other rivers(B) the water elsewhere in the world’s rivers(C) any other river in the world(D) all rivers in the world(E) any of the world’s rivers elsewhere
2. The owners of stadiums that bear the names of nowbankrupt companies have a problem what to do aboutthe names.
(A) what to do about the names(B) what they should do about the names(C) deciding what to do about those names(D) to decide as to whether the names should stay(E) should they change those names or not
3. During the Fourth of July weekend in 1947, about sixmillion people crowded onto the beach and into theamusements at Coney Island, “America’s Playground,”in Brooklyn, New York.
(A) During the Fourth of July weekend in 1947,(B) It was the Fourth of July weekend in 1947 that(C) The Fourth of July weekend that occurred in 1947
was when(D) The Fourth of July weekend in 1947,(E) Occurring in 1947 over the Fourth of July
weekend,
4. Because fiscal problems will force some cities to layoff firefighters, and so the state legislature must decidewhether to provide those cities with financial aid.
(A) firefighters, and so(B) firefighters is a matter(C) firefighters,(D) firefighters; then(E) firefighters; this is a problem
5. A recently published history of comic books reveal thatBatman was begun as an experiment but became aninstitution.
(A) recently published history of comic books revealthat Batman was begun as an experiment
(B) recently published history of comic books revealsthat Batman began as an experiment
(C) recent published history of comic books revealedthat Batman, who began as an experiment
(D) history of comic books, recently published,revealing Batman first began as an experiment
(E) history of comic books having been recentlypublished, it reveals how Batman began as anexperiment
8950
8955
8960
8965
8970
8975
8980
8985
8990
8995
9000
9005
9010
280
6. A discovery in New Jersey actually contributed to theearly economic development of America and, in 1714,a worker uncovered a green rock containing copper.
(A) America and, in 1714, a worker uncovered(B) America when, in 1714, a worker uncovered(C) America, thus, in 1714, a worker uncovered(D) America, that being a worker in 1714 uncovering(E) America, it was in 1714 a worker uncovered
7. Selected as an astronaut by NASA in 1990, over719 hours in space were spent by Dr. Ellen Ochoaon three flights by 2001.
(A) over 719 hours in space were spent byDr. Ellen Ochoa on three flights by 2001
(B) by 2001, and on three flights, Dr. Ellen Ochoaspent over 719 hours in space
(C) three flights and 719 hours were spent byDr. Ellen Ochoa in space by 2001
(D) Dr. Ellen Ochoa, by 2001 spending over719 hours in space on three flights
(E) Dr. Ellen Ochoa had spent over 719 hoursin space on three flights by 2001
8. The old maxim “Let the buyer beware” suggests that asa buyer we are responsible for inspecting merchandisefor flaws before paying for it.
(A) as a buyer we are responsible(B) as a buyer it is their responsibility(C) the buyer is the responsible one(D) buyers are responsible(E) buyers are to be the ones responsible
9. The same analysts who once favored public-opinionpolls now see them as hampering representativegovernment.
(A) The same analysts who once favored public-opinionpolls now see them
(B) The same analysts which were once in favor ofpublic-opinion polls now have come to see them
(C) Public-opinion polls, once favored byanalysts, but now seen by these same analysts
(D) As for favoring public-opinion polls, the sameanalysts now see them
(E) Analysts once were in favor of public-opinionpolls, which these same analysts now see
10. Santa Fe is one of the oldest cities in the United States,its adobe architecture, spectacular setting, and clear,radiant light have long made it a magnet for artists.
(A) Santa Fe is one of the oldest cities in the UnitedStates, its
(B) Santa Fe, which is one of the oldest cities in theUnited States, its
(C) Santa Fe, which is one of the oldest cities in theUnited States, has
(D) Santa Fe is one of the oldest cities in the UnitedStates; its
(E) Santa Fe, one of the oldest cities in the UnitedStates, and its
11. Dime novels, known in nineteenth-century Englandas “penny dreadfuls,” flourished because increasedmechanization of printing and increased literacy ratesmade production of large numbers of these booksprofitable.
(A) and increased literacy rates made(B) with increased literacy rates also made(C) and also literacy rates increased and made(D) as well as increased literacy rates, making(E) and literacy rates increased, making
12. Frequently on tour, a band called the Chieftainsrevered internationally as spirited performers oftraditional Irish music.
(A) revered internationally as spirited performers(B) revered internationally and they are spirited
performers(C) is revered internationally for its spirited
performances(D) is revered internationally as giving spirited
performances(E) are revered internationally as being spirited
performers
9015
9020
9025
9030
9035
9040
9045
9050
9055
9060
9065
9070
9075
9080
9085
9090
9095
9100
9105
9110
13. Psychologists advise that before making any majorchanges in your life, a person needs to focus on one’sgoals.
(A) your life, a person needs to focus on one’s goals(B) their life, a person needs to focus on their goals(C) their lives, focus on the goals(D) one’s life, you should focus on your goals(E) their lives, people should focus on their goals
14. Some beaches are frequently contaminated byuntreated sewage that flows into the ocean, which canlast for several days.
(A) ocean, which can last for several days(B) ocean that can last for several days(C) ocean, it can last for several days(D) ocean, while contamination can last several days(E) ocean; the contamination can last for several days
9115
9120
9125
9130
9135
9140
9145
9150
9155
9160
9165
9170
9175
9180
9185
Practice Test 6
SECTION 1 WRITING – ESSAY
Time – 25 minutes
The essay gives you an opportunity to show how effectively you can develop and express ideas. You should, therefore, takecare to develop your point of view, present your ideas logically and clearly, and use language precisely.
Your essay must be written on the lines provided on your answer sheet – you will receive no other paper on which to write.You will have enough space if you write on every line, avoid wide margins, and keep your handwriting to a reasonable size.Remember that people who are not familiar with your handwriting will read what you write. Try to write or print so that whatyou are writing is legible to those readers.
You have twenty-five minutes to write an essay on the topic assigned below. DO NOT WRITE ON ANOTHER TOPIC.AN OFF-TOPIC ESSAY WILL RECEIVE A SCORE OF ZERO.
Think carefully about the issue presented in the following quotations and the assignment below.
Assignment: Should people make more of an effort to keep some things private? Plan and write an essay in which youdevelop your point of view on this issue. Support your position with reasoning and examples taken fromyour reading, studies, experience, or observations.
Nowadays nothing is private: our culture has become too confessional and self-expressive.People think that to hide one’ s thoughts or feelings is to pretend not to have those thoughtsor feelings. They assume that honesty requires one to express every inclination and impulse.
Adapted from J. David Velleman, “The Genesis of Shame”
285
9190
9195
9200
9205
9210
9215
9220
Practice Test 6
SECTION 2 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Years of ------- lifting of heavy furniture had left himtoo ------- to be able to stand erect for long periods oftime.
(A) profitable .. dumbfounded(B) generous .. distracted(C) onerous .. hesitant(D) strenuous .. debilitated(E) unstinting .. eminent
2. Canadian Lynn Johnston was named Cartoonist ofthe Year in 1985, the first woman to be so -------.
(A) inspired (B) entrusted (C) honored(D) employed (E) refined
3. Because the photographer believed that wild animalsshould be ------- only in their various naturalsurroundings, she ------- often in her career.
(A) depicted .. traveled(B) displayed .. spoke(C) captured .. protested(D) domesticated .. roamed(E) represented .. publicized
4. Folk painter Grandma Moses has become suchan enduring icon that many consider her ------ofAmerica.
(A) an innovator (B) an emblem (C) a successor(D) a detractor (E) a lobbyist
5. Whether substances are medicines or poisons oftendepends on dosage, for substances that are ------- insmall doses can be ------- in large.
(A) useless .. effective(B) mild .. benign(C) curative .. toxic(D) harmful .. fatal(E) beneficial .. miraculous
6. Critics dismissed the engineer’s seemingly creativedesign as being -------, that is, underdeveloped andlacking in sophistication.
(A) defunct (B) unorthodox (C) simplistic(D) erroneous (E) ambiguous
7. The professor commented to other faculty members thatSheila seemed temperamentally suited to the study oflogic, given her ------- for ------- intricate arguments.
(A) sympathy .. influencing(B) penchant .. evading(C) disregard .. unhinging(D) contempt .. following(E) bent .. analyzing
8. While traveling near the Sun, the comet Hale-Boppproduced a ------- amount of dust, much more than thecomets Halley or Hyakutake.
(A) voracious (B) disposable (C) redundant(D) superficial (E) prodigious
9225
9230
9235
9240
9245
9250
9255
9260
9265
9270
9275
9280
9285
9290
9295
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
9300
290
Questions 9-10 are based on the following passage.
Newspaper editor and political commentator HenryLouis Mencken was a force of nature, brushing asideall objects animal and mineral in his headlong rushto the publicity that surely awaited him. He seizedeach day, shook it to within an inch of its life, andthen gaily went on to the next. No matter where hiswriting appeared, it was quoted widely, his pungentlyoutspoken opinions debated hotly. Nobody else couldmake so many people so angry, or make so many otherslaugh so hard.
9. In lines 4-5, the words “seized” and “shook” helpestablish which aspect of Mencken’s personality?
(A) His code of honor(B) His sense of humor(C) His vindictiveness(D) His intensity(E) His petulance
10. The public response described in lines 6-8 moststrongly suggests that Mencken’s writings were
(A) authoritative(B) controversial(C) arrogant(D) informal(E) frivolous
Questions 11-12 are based on the following passage.
The ability to see the situation as your opponents see it,as difficult as it may be, is one of the most important skills
that you can possess as a negotiator. You must know morethan simply that they see things differently. It is notenough to study them like beetles under a microscope;you need to know what it feels like to be a beetle. Toaccomplish this you should be prepared to withholdjudgment as you "try on" their views. Your opponentsmay well believe that their views are right as stronglyas you believe yours are.
11. The reference to beetles in lines 15-16 servesto suggest that
(A) people need to be more attuned to theirsurroundings
(B) effective negotiation is more of a sciencethan an art
(C) people can be made to do what theywould prefer not to do
(D) effective negotiation requires identify-ing with a different viewpoint
(E) people feel uncomfortable when theiractions are under scrutiny
12. The primary purpose of the passage is to
(A) persuade people to defend their positionson critical issues
(B) indicate a specific ability that is usefulin negotiation
(C) encourage people to be more acceptingof others
(D) argue that few people are fit for thedemands of negotiation
(E) suggest that negotiators should alwaysseek consensus
9305
9310
9315
9320
Questions 13-24 are based on the following passages.
Passage 1 is from a 2003 book that examines the famous“1 Have a Dream” speech delivered by Martin LutherKing, Jr. at the historic March on Washington in August1963. Passage 2 is from a 2000 biography of Martin LutherKing, Jr. written by an African American scholar.
Passage 1
The ability of the “I Have a Dream” speech to high-light King’s early career at the expense of his later careeraccounts for the tone of impatience and betrayal that oftenappears when modern-day supporters of King’s agenda talkabout the speech. Former Georgia state legislator JulianBond said in 1986 that commemorations of King seemed to“focus almost entirely on Martin Luther King the dreamer,not on Martin King the antiwar activist, not on Martin Kingthe challenger of the economic order, not on Martin Kingthe opponent of apartheid, not on the complete MartinLuther King.” One King scholar has proposed a ten-yearmoratorium on reading or listening to the “I Have a Dream”speech, in the hopes that America will then discover therest of King’s legacy.
This proposal effectively concedes that King’s mag-nificent address cannot be recovered from the misuseand overquotation it has suffered since his death. Butit is not clear that this is so. Even now, upon hearing thespeech, one is struck by the many forms of King’s genius.Many people can still remember the first time they heard“I Have a Dream,” and they tend to speak of that memorywith the reverence reserved for a religious experience. Atthe very least, reflecting on the “I Have a Dream” speechshould be an opportunity to be grateful for the astonishingtransformation of America that the freedom movementwrought. In just under a decade, the civil rights move-ment brought down a system of segregation that stoodessentially unaltered since Reconstruction. King’s dreamsof an America free from racial discrimination are still somedistance away, but it is astounding how far the nation hascome since that hot August day in 1963. Segregation inthe South has been dismantled; there are no longer“Whites Only” signs; segregationist governors do nottry to prevent Black children from entering public schools.Toward the end of his life, King preached a sermon entitled“Ingratitude,” in which he called ingratitude “one of thegreatest of all sins,” because the sinner “fail[sl to realizehis dependence on others.” The annual Martin Luther Kingholiday is properly a day of national thanksgiving, a timefor the nation to recognize the immense debt it owes toKing and the thousands of heroes of the civil rightsmovement for saving the soul of America.
Passage 2
Martin Luther King was at his best when he waswilling to reshape the wisdom of many of his intellec-tual predecessors. He ingeniously harnessed their ideasto his views to advocate sweeping social change. Hebelieved that his early views on race failed to challengeAmerica fundamentally. He later confessed that he hadunderestimated how deeply entrenched racism was inAmerica. If Black Americans could not depend on good-will to create social change, they had to provoke socialchange through bigger efforts at nonviolent direct action.This meant that Blacks and their allies had to obtainpolitical power. They also had to try to restructureAmerican society, solving the riddles of povertyand economic inequality.
This is not the image of King that is celebrated onMartin Luther King Day. Many of King’s admirers areuncomfortable with a focus on his mature beliefs. Theyseek to deflect unfair attacks on King’s legacy by shroud-ing him in the cloth of superhuman heroism. In truth, thisshroud is little more than romantic tissue. King’s imagehas often suffered a sad fate. His strengths have beenneedlessly exaggerated, his weaknesses wildly over-played. King’s true legacy has been lost to culturalamnesia. As a nation, we have emphasized King’saspiration to save America through inspiring wordsand sacrificial deeds. Time and again we replay thepowerful image of King standing on a national stagein the shadow of the Lincoln Memorial mouthing per-haps the most famous four words ever uttered by a BlackAmerican: “I have a dream.” For most Americans, thosewords capture King’ unique genius. They express hisimmortal longing for freedom, a longing that is familiarto every person who dares imagine a future beyond unjustlaws and unfair customs. The edifying universality of thosefour words-who hasn’t dreamed, and who cannot identifywith people whose dreams of a better world are punishedwith violence? – helps to explain their durability. But thosewords survive, too, because they comfort folk who wouldrather entertain the dreams of unfree people than confronttheir rage and despair.
13. The authors of both passages agree that King’s “I Havea Dream” speech
(A) had significant global as well as national influence(B) has been imitated by many of King’s followers(C) had a profound impact on many Americans(D) was typical of King’s thought as a whole(E) questioned the ethical beliefs of many Americans
9325
9330
9335
9340
9345
9350
9355
9360
9365
9370
9375
9380
9385
9390
9395
9400
14. It can be inferred that, for Julian Bond, a portrait of“the complete Martin Luther King” (lines 10-11)would
(A) celebrate King’s influence both within and out-side the United States
(B) acknowledge the logical lapses in some of King’slater work
(C) compare King with other significant figures ofhis era
(D) achieve a balance between King’s earlier concernsand his later ones
(E) reveal information about King’s personal as wellas his public life
15. The author of Passage 2 would most likely view JulianBond’s statement in lines 7-11 of Passage 1 with
(A) outright disapproval(B) considerable surprise(C) cynical mistrust(D) cautious optimism(E) complete agreement
16. In line 17, ‘suffered” most nearly means
(A) endured(B) felt(C) prolonged(D) tolerated(E) lamented
17. Lines 31-34 ("Segregation in ... schools") serveprimarily to
(A) express ambitious hopes for the future(B) challenge the accuracy of historical
accounts(C) provide a contrast with other cultures(D) illustrate a point with particular examples(E) defend a series of unusual occurrences
18. The author of Passage 1 mentions the “sermon”(line 35) primarily in order to
(A) show King’s effectiveness as a public speaker(B) demonstrate the broad range of King’s interests(C) illustrate an important trait that King possessed(D) question King’s ability to empathize with others(E) remind readers of a significant obligation to King
19. The author of Passage 2 would most likely characterizethe view of King expressed in lines 38-42 of Passage 1
(“The annual ... America”) as(A) contradictory(B) insightful(C) atypical(D) simplistic(E) arrogant
20. Lines 57-58 (“This is ... Da”) mark a transitionwithin Passage 2 from a
(A) consideration of King’s views to a critiqueof people’s understanding of them
(B) challenge to King’s beliefs to an acceptanceof their cultural resonance
(C) discussion of King’s intellectual predecessorsto an analysis of his legacy
(D) celebration of King’s strengths to an examinationof his weaknesses
(E) defense of King’s aspirations to an attackon those who fail to support them
21. Lines 76-79 in Passage 2 (“The edifying ...durability”) are best described as
(A) contesting the notion of King’s historicalimportance that is advanced by the authorof Passage 1
(B) providing an explanation for the view ofKing’s speech that is expressed by theauthor of Passage 1
(C) challenging the portrait of the civil rightsmovement that is presented by the authorof Passage 1
(D) offering a humorous anecdote that supportsa statement made by the authorof Passage 1
(E) dismissing a perspective that is similarlyrejected by the author of Passage 1
22. Unlike the author of Passage 2, the author of Passage 1develops his or her argument by
(A) citing an authority with whom he or she disagrees(B) referring to a famous speech delivered by King(C) discussing the universal human trait of dreaming(D) dismissing those who fail to understand the
subtlety of King’s thought(E) assuming that his or her readers are completely
unfamiliar with King’s ideas
295
9405
9410
9415
9420
9425
9430
9435
9440
9445
9450
9455
9460
9465
9470
9475
9480
9485
9490
9495
9500
9505
9510
23. The author of Passage 2 would most likely arguethat commemorations focus on “Martin Luther Kingthe dreamer” (line 7 of Passage 1) because peoplefind this aspect of King to be
(A) courageous(B) unpretentious(C) reassuring(D) provocative(E) unexpected
24. Which best characterizes the overall relationshipbetween the two passages?
(A) Passage 2 rejects the political goals that aredescribed in Passage 1.
(B) Passage 2 helps account for the responses to aspeech discussed in Passage 1.
(C) Passage 2 romanticizes a person who isobjectively depicted in Passage 1.
(D) Passage 2 recounts the history of a nationalholiday that is celebrated in Passage 1.
(E) Passage 2 reflects on a figure who isdenounced in Passage I.
9515
9520
9525
9530
9535
9540
9545
9550
9555
9560
9565
9570
9575
9580
9585
9590
9595
9600
SECTION 4 CRITICAL READING
Time – 25 minutes
24 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. Many private universities depend heavily on -------, thewealthy individuals who support them with gifts andbequests.
(A) instructors (B) administrators(C) monitors (D) accountants(E) benefactors
2. One of the characters in Milton Murayama’s novelis considered ------- because he deliberately defiesan oppressive hierarchical society.
(A) rebellious (B) impulsive (C) artistic(D) industrious (E) tyrannical
3. Night jars possess a camouflage perhaps unparalleledin the bird world: by day they roost hidden in shadywoods, so ------- with their surroundings that they arenearly impossible to -------.
(A) vexed .. dislodge(B) blended .. discern(C) harmonized .. interrupt(D) impatient .. distinguish(E) integrated .. classify
4. Many economists believe that since resources arescarce and since human desires cannot all be -------,a method of ------- is needed.
(A) indulged .. apportionment(B) verified .. distribution(C) usurped .. expropriation(D) expressed .. reparation(E) anticipated .. advertising
5. The range of colors that homeowners could use on theexterior of their houses was ------- by the community’sstringent rules regarding upkeep of property.
(A) circumscribed(C) embellished(E) cultivated(B) bolstered(D) insinuated
9605
9610
9615
9620
9625
9630
9635
9640
9645
9650
9655
9660
9665
9670
300
The passages below are followed by questions based on their content; questions following a pair of related passages may alsobe based on the relationship between the paired passages. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in thepassages and in any introductory material that may be provided.
9675
Questions 6-9 are based on the following passages.
Passage 1
I know what your e-mail in-box looks like, and itisn’t pretty: a babble of come-ons and lies from huckstersand con artists. To find your real e-mail, you must wadethrough the torrent of fraud and obscenity known politelyas “unsolicited bulk e-mail” and colloquially as “spam.”In a perverse tribute to the power of the online revolution,we are all suddenly getting the same mail: easy weightloss, get-rich-quick schemes, etc. The crush of these mes-sages is now numbered in billions per day. “It’s becominga major systems and engineering and network problem,”says one e-mail expert. “Spammers are gaining control ofthe Internet.”
Passage 2
Many people who hate spam assume that it is protectedas free speech. Not necessarily so. The United StatesSupreme Court has previously ruled that individualsmay preserve a threshold of privacy. “Nothing in theConstitution compels us to listen to or view any unwantedcommunication, whatever its merit,” wrote Chief JusticeWarren Burger in a 1970 decision. “We therefore categori-cally reject the argument that a vendor has a right to sendunwanted material into the home of another.” With regardto a seemingly similar problem, the Telephone ConsumerProtection Act of 1991 made it illegal in the United Statesto send unsolicited faxes; why not extend the act to includeunsolicited bulk e-mail?
6. The primary purpose of Passage1 is to
(A) make a comparison(B) dispute a hypothesis(C) settle a controversy(D) justify a distinction
(E) highlight a concern
7. The primary purpose of Passage 2 is to
(A) confirm a widely held belief(B) discuss the inadequacies of a ruling(C) defend a controversial technology(D) analyze a widespread social problem(E) lay the foundation for a course of action
8. What would be the most likely reaction by the authorof Passage 1 to the argument cited in lines 16-21 ofPassage 2 (“Nothing ... another”) ?
(A) Surprise at the assumption that freedom of speechis indispensable to democracy
(B) Dismay at the Supreme Court’s vigorous defenseof vendors’ rights
(C) Hope that the same reasoning would be appliedto all unsolicited e-mail
(D) Concern for the plight of mass marketers facingsubstantial economic losses
(E) Appreciation for the political complexity ofthe debate about spam
9. Unlike the author of Passage 1, the author of Passage 2
(A) criticizes a practice(B) offers an example(C) proposes a solution(D) states an opinion(E) quotes an expert
9680
9685
9690
9695
9700
Questions 10-16 are based on the following passage.
The following passage is adapted from a novel set inthe early twentieth century. Mr. Beebe, a clergyman, isspeaking with Cecil Vyse about a mutual acquaintance,Lucy Honeychurch. Miss Honeychurch has recentlyreturned from a journey with her older cousin andchaperone, Miss Bartlett.
“Lucy Honeychurch has no faults” said Cecil,with grave sincerity.
“I quite agree. At present she has none.”“At present?”“I’m not cynical. I’m only thinking of my pet theory
about Miss Honeychurch. Does it seem reasonable thatshe should play piano so wonderfully, and live so quietly?I suspect that someday she shall be wonderful in both.The water-tight compartments in her will break down,and music and life will mingle. Then we shall have herheroically good, heroically bad-too heroic, perhaps,to be good or bad.”
Cecil found his companion interesting.“And at present you think her not wonderful as far
as life goes?”“Well, I must say I’ve only seen her at Tunbridge
Wells, where she was not wonderful, and at Florence.She wasn’t wonderful in Florence either, but I kepton expecting that she would be.”
“In what way?”Conversation had become agreeable to them, and
they were pacing up and down the terrace.“I could as easily tell you what tune she’ll play next.
There was simply the sense that she found wings andmeant to use them. I can show you a beautiful picturein my diary. Miss Honeychurch as a kite, Miss Bartlettholding the string. Picture number two: the string breaks.”
The sketch was in his diary, but it had been made after-wards, when he viewed things artistically. At the time hehad given surreptitious tugs to the string himself.
“But the string never broke?”“No. I mightn’t have seen Miss Honeychurch rise,
but I should certainly have heard Miss Bartlett fall.”“It has broken now,” said the young man in low,
vibrating tones.Immediately he realized that of all the conceited,
ludicrous, contemptible ways of announcing an engage-ment this was the worst. He cursed his love of metaphor;had he suggested that he was a star and that Lucy wassoaring up to reach him?
“Broken? What do you mean?”“I meant,” Cecil said stift1y, “that she is going
to marry me.”The clergyman was conscious of some bitter
disappointment which he could not keep out of hisvoice.
“I am sorry; I must apologize. I had no idea youwere intimate with her, or I should never have talkedin this flippant, superficial way. You ought to havestopped me.” And down in the garden he saw Lucyherself; yes, he was disappointed.
Cecil, who naturally preferred congratulationsto apologies, drew down the corner of his mouth. Wasthis the reaction his action would get from the wholeworld? Of course, he despised the world as a whole;every thoughtful man should; it is almost a test ofrefinement.
“I’m sorry I have given you a shock,” he saiddryly. “I fear that Lucy’s choice does not meet withyour approval.”
10. Cecil’s remark in line 1 (“Lucy ... faults”) is madein a tone of
(A) great conviction(B) studied neutrality(C) playful irony(D) genuine surprise(E) weary cynicism
11. Mr. Beebe asks the question in lines 6-7 (“Does ...quietly”) primarily in order to
(A) raise an urgent concern(B) anticipate a possible objection(C) challenge a widely accepted theory(D) note an apparent inconsistency(E) criticize a popular pastime
12. Mr. Beebe’s statement, “The water-tight ... bad”(lines 9-11), suggests that Lucy will
(A) ultimately become a famous and respectedmusician
(B) eventually play music in a less disciplinedfashion
(C) one day begin to live with great passion(D) soon regret an impetuous decision(E) someday marry a man who will be the
cause of her undoing
305
9705
9710
9715
9720
9725
9730
9735
9740
9745
9750
9755
9760
13. In line 24, “sense” most nearly means
(A) definition(B) intelligence(C) plausibility(D) consensus(E) impression
14. For Mr. Beebe, “Picture number two” (line 27)represents
(A) a misleading occurrence(B) a dangerous gamble(C) an unlikely development(D) an anticipated outcome(E) an avoidable difficulty
15. Ultimately, Cecil views his remark in line 34(“It ... now”) as
(A) singularly poetic(B) particularly memorable(C) embarrassingly inapt(D) excessively critical(E) regrettably underhanded
16. The question in lines 39-40 (“had ... him”) suggeststhat Cecil fears that Mr. Beebe will
(A) detect the lack of originality in his thinking(B) consider him to be vain(C) tell Lucy of his inappropriate remark(D) distrust him as a confidant(E) attempt to block his engagement to Lucy
9765
9770
9775
9780
9785
9790
9795
9800
9805
9810
9815
9820
9825
9830
9835
9840
Questions 17-24 are based on the following passage.
The following passage is adapted from a book published in1999.
Calling it a cover-up would be far too dramatic. But formore than half a century-even in the midst of some ofthe greatest scientific achievements in history-physicistshave been quietly aware of a dark cloud looming on adistant horizon. The problem is this: There are twofoundational pillars upon which modern physics rests.One is general relativity, which provides a theoreticalframework for understanding the universe on the largestof scales: stars, galaxies, clusters of galaxies, and beyondto the immense expanse of the universe itself. The otheris quantum mechanics, which provides a theoreticalframework for understanding the universe on the small-est of scales: molecules, atoms, and all the way down tosubatomic particles like electrons and quarks. Throughyears of research, physicists have experimentally confirmedto almost unimaginable accuracy virtually all predictionsmade by each of these theories. But these same theoreticaltools inexorably lead to another disturbing conclusion:As they are currently formulated, general relativity andquantum mechanics cannot both be right. The two theoriesunderlying the tremendous progress of physics duringthe last hundred years-progress that has explained theexpansion of the heavens and the fundamental structureof matter – are mutually incompatible.
If you have not heard previously about this ferociousantagonism, you may be wondering why. The answer isnot hard to come by. In all but the most extreme situations,physicists study things that are either small and light (likeatoms and their constituents) or things that are huge andheavy (like stars and galaxies), but not both. This meansthat they need use only quantum mechanics or only generalrelativity and can, with a furtive glance, shrug off the bark-ing admonition of the other. For 50 years this approachhas not been quite as blissful as ignorance, but it has beenpretty close.
But the universe can be extreme. In the central depths ofa black hole, an enormous mass is crushed to a minusculesize. According to the big bang theory, the whole of theuniverse erupted from a microscopic nugget whose sizemakes a grain of sand look colossal. These are realms thatare tiny and yet incredibly massive, therefore requiringthat both quantum mechanics and general relativity simul-taneously be brought to bear. The equations of generalrelativity and quantum mechanics, when combined, beginto shake, rattle, and gush with steam like a decrepit auto-mobile. Put less figuratively, well-posed physical questionselicit nonsensical answers from the unhappy amalgam of
these two theories. Even if you are willing to keep thedeep interior of a black hole and the beginning of theuniverse shrouded in mystery, you can’t help feeling thatthe hostility between quantum mechanics and generalrelativity cries out for a deeper level of understanding.Can it really be that the universe at its most fundamentallevel is divided, requiring one set of laws when things arelarge and a different, incompatible set when things aresmall?
Superstring theory, a young upstart compared with thevenerable edifices of quantum mechanics and generalrelativity, answers with a resounding no. Intense researchover the past decade by physicists and mathematiciansaround the world has revealed that this new approach todescribing matter at its most fundamental level resolvesthe tension between general relativity and quantummechanics. In fact, superstring theory shows more:within this new framework, general relativity andquantum mechanics require one another for the theoryto make sense. According to superstring theory, themarriage of the laws of the large and the small is notonly happy but inevitable. Superstring theory has thepotential to show that all of the wondrous happeningsin the universe-from the frantic dance of subatomicquarks to the stately waltz of orbiting binary stars-arereflections of one grand physical principle, one masterequation.
17. The “dark cloud” mentioned in line 4 refers to an
(A) atypical diagnosis(B) unsupported hypothesis(C) unknown threat(D) evil influence(E) important contradiction
18. Which pairing best represents the different modelsof the universe presented in lines 7-14 ?
(A) Big and little(B) Old and new(C) Complex and simple(D) Verified and undocumented(E) Theoretical and practical
19. The author’s use of italics in line 20 serves primarily to
(A) draw attention to a commonly known hypothesis(B) stress a speculative aspect of two theories(C) support a difficult claim(D) underscore a surprising point(E) emphasize an area of agreement
9845
9850
9855
9860
9865
9870
9875
9880
9885
9890
9895
9900
9905
9910
9915
310
20. The author uses the “automobile” (lines 45-46) torepresent equations that
(A) demand a professional’s attention(B) are intrinsically unreliable(C) do not work together effectively(D) can be easily adjusted if necessary(E) are based on dated mathematics
21. Which of the following, if available, would bestrefute the author’s assertion about the “young upstart”(line 57) ?
(A) Evidence that certain kinds of particles in natureexceed the speed of light
(B) Confirmation of conditions that existed in theearliest stages of the big bang
(C) Speculation that the deep interior of a black holeis not as dense as scientists have believed
(D) Mathematical formulas that link general relativityand quantum mechanics in the same realm
(E) Proof that the laws governing the universe dependon the size of the system being studied
22. The primary reason described for the usefulness of thetheory mentioned in line 57 is its ability to
(A) explain new phenomena(B) replace the theory of general relativity(C) reinforce the predictions of quantum mechanics(D) indicate where other theories are inapplicable(E) reconcile two seemingly contradictory theories
23. Those who hold the “conclusion” referred to in line 18would most likely believe that the “marriage” (line 68)was an
(A) inevitable result of their research(B) unjustifiable elevation of their hypotheses(C) inadvisable use of research funds(D) unfortunate consequence(E) impossible outcome
24. The author uses dance imagery in lines 71-72 in order to
(A) suggest a similarity between the study of scienceand the study of dance
(B) highlight the extremes found in the physicalworld
(C) emphasize the different ways that binary starsmove
(D) illustrate the intricacy of the subatomic worldof quarks
(E) suggest the cohesive nature of both science anddance
9920
9925
9930
9935
9940
9945
9950
9955
9960
9965
9970
9975
9980
9985
9990
9995
10000
SECTION 6 WRITING
Time - 25 minutes
35 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. Since last September Patricia has been working at theconvenience store down the road.
(A) has been working(B) works(C) is working(D) will be working(E) worked
2. To help freshmen and sophomores in selecting theircourses, candid reviews of courses and instructorscompiled by juniors and seniors.
(A) candid reviews of courses and instructorscompiled by juniors and seniors
(B) candid reviews of courses and instructors beingcompiled by juniors and seniors
(C) and to compile candid reviews of courses andinstructors by juniors and seniors
(D) juniors and seniors have compiled candid reviewsof courses and instructors
(E) with juniors and seniors compiling candid reviewsof courses and instructors
3. The landscape artist who designed New York City’sCentral Park believed that providing scenic settingsaccessible to all would not only benefit the public’sphysical and mental health and also foster a sense ofdemocracy.
(A) and also foster a sense of democracy(B) as it also fosters a sense of democracy(C) and would foster a sense of democracy also(D) but also foster a sense of democracy(E) and foster a sense of democracy also
4. In areas where deer roam freely, residents must dressto protect themselves against deer ticks that mighttransmit diseases.
(A) areas where deer roam freely(B) areas roamed by deer freely(C) areas, freely roamed by deer(D) areas, in which there are deer that roam freely(E) areas which deer roam free
10005
10010
10015
10020
10025
10030
10035
10040
10045
10050
10055
10060
5. Given the cost of a hardcover book, the price of ittypically hovers around $25, many consumers ask theirbook dealers, "When will the paperback be out?"
(A) the price of it typically hovers(B) and typically it hovers at a price(C) which typically hovers(D) in that it typically hovers(E) they typically hover
6. The article featured the Sea Islands because many wereknown there to live much as their ancestors of acentury ago had lived.
(A) many were known there to live(B) they were known there for living(C) many of the people there were known to live(D) of the many people, they were there living(E) of knowing that many people lived there
7. A poetic form congenial to Robert Browning was thedramatic monologue, it let him explore a character’smind without the simplifications demanded by stageproductions.
(A) monologue, it let him explore(B) monologue, which let him explore(C) monologue that lets him explore(D) monologue; letting him explore(E) monologue by letting him do exploration of
8. Many eighteenth- and nineteenth-century Romanticpoets were believers in rebellion against socialconventions, express strong emotion, and the powerof imagination.
(A) were believers in rebellion against soci~lconventions, express strong emotion
(B) are believers in rebelling against socialconventions, strong emotions being expressed
(C) who believed in rebellion against socialconventions, express strong emotion
(D) believed in rebellion against social conventions, toexpress strong emotions
(E) believed in rebellion against social conventions,the expression of strong emotions
9. At the Constitutional Convention of 1787, the proposalto replace the existing Articles of Confederation with afederal constitution were met with fierce opposition.
(A) were met with(B) having been met with(C) it met(D) met with(E) met their
10. When for the first time the United States importedmore oil than it exported, Americans should haverealized that an energy crisis was imminent and couldhappen in the future.
(A) was imminent and could happen in the future(B) could happen imminently in the future(C) will be imminent and happening soon(D) is an imminent thing(E) might be imminent
11. Intimacy, love, and marriage are three different, ifinterrelated, subjects.
(A) different, if interrelated, subjects(B) interrelated subjects, being, however, different(C) different subjects, whereas they are interrelated(D) different subjects when interrelated(E) subjects that are different although being
interrelated
315
10065
10070
10075
10080
10085
10090
10095
10100
10105
10110
10115
10120
10125
10130
10135
10140
10145
10150
10155
The following sentences test your ability to recognizegrammar and usage errors. Each sentence contains eithera single error or no error at all. No sentence contains morethan one error. The error, if there is one, is underlinedand lettered. If the sentence contains an error, select theone underlined part that must be changed to make thesentence correct. If the sentence is correct, select choice E.In choosing answers, follow the requirements of standardwritten English.
EXAMPLE:
The other delegates and him immediately A B Caccepted the resolution drafted by the Dneutral states. No error
E
12. America’s first roller coaster ride, which opened in
A
1884 at Coney Island, Brooklyn, and capable of
B
a top speed of only six miles per hour. No error
C D E
13. The inflation rate in that country is so high that
A
even with adjusted wages, most workers can barely
B C D
pay for food and shelter. No error
E
14. Over the past two years, apparel manufacturers have
A B
worked to meeting the revised federal standards
C
for the design of uniforms. No error
D E
15. Storing bread in the refrigerator delays drying and the
A
growth of mold but increase the rate at which the
B C
bread loses flavor. No error
D E
16. According to last week’s survey, most voters
were disappointed by legislators’ inability working
A B C
together on key issues. No error
D E
17. When Marie Curie shared the 1903 Nobel Prize for
A
Physics with two other scientists – her husband
B
Pierre Curie and Henri Becquerel – she had been
C
the first woman to win the prize. No error
D E
18. Question 18 did not count toward your score.
19. Those investors who sold stocks just before the
A B
stock market crashed in 1929 were either wise or
C
exceptional lucky. No error
D E
10160
10165
10170
10175
10180
10185
10190
10195
10200
10205
10210
10215
10220
20. Most of the sediment and nutrients of the
Mississippi River no longer reach the coastal
A
wetlands, a phenomenon that has adversely
B
affected the region’s ecological balance.
C D
No error
E
21. Most major air pollutants cannot be seen, although
large amounts of them concentrated in cities
A B
are visible as smog. No error
C D E
22. The light emitted by high-intensity-discharge
car headlights are very effective in activating
A B
the reflective paints of road markers, thereby
C
making driving at night safer. No error
D E
23. During the nineteenth century, Greek mythology
A
acquired renewed significance when both poets and
B
painters turned to the ancient myths for subject
C D
matter. No error
E
24. The museum is submitting proposals to several
A B
foundations in the hope to gain funds to build
C D
a tropical butterfly conservatory. No error
E
25. In order for the audience to believe in and
A
be engaged by a Shakespearean character,
B
they have to come across as a real person
C D
on the stage. No error
E
26. Most of the hypotheses that Kepler developed
A B
to explain physical forces were later rejected as
C
inconsistent to Newtonian theory. No error
D E
27. Lynn Margulis’s theory that evolution is a process
A
involving interdependency rather than competition
B
among organisms differs dramatically from
C
most biologists. No error
D E
28. The Empire State Building, the Sears Tower, the
Canadian National Tower – each of these structures
A
was the tallest in the world at the time they were
B C D
built. No error
E
29. The cost of safely disposing of the toxic chemicals
A
is approximately five times what the company paid
B C
to purchase it. No error
D E
10225
10230
10235
10240
10245
10250
10255
10260
10265
10270
10275
10280
10285
10290
10295
10300
10305
10310
320
Directions: The following passage is an early draft of anessay. Some parts of the passage need to be rewritten.
Read the passage and select the best answers for thequestions that follow. Some questions are about particularsentences or parts of sentences and ask you to improvesentence structure or word choice. Other questions ask youto consider organization and development. In choosinganswers, follow the requirements of standard written English.
Questions 30-35 refer to the following passage.
(1) On September 10, 1973, the United States PostalService issued a stamp honoring Henry Ossawa Tanner(1859-1937), one of four stamps in the American Artsseries. (2) Acclaimed as an artist in the United States andEurope at the turn of the century, Tanner was called the“dean” of art by W. E. B. Du Bois. (3) But after his death,Tanner’s work was largely forgotten. (4) And so itremained, and even later, in 1969, the donation of one ofhis paintings to the Smithsonian Institution aroused newinterest in the art of this American master. (5) Now hisworks are on exhibit again. (6) You can even buy posters ofhis paintings!
(7) One of his most famous works is a realistic paintingby the name of “The Banjo Lesson.” (8) It was inspired bya poem of Paul Laurence Dunbar. (9) The painting isn’tlike a photograph. (10) The magnificence of his work canbe seen with each subtle brush stroke, each carefullycrafted detail. (11) The effect is truly beautiful. (12) If Iwere to try to identify the dominant theme of the painting, Iwould have to say that it is family cohesiveness because theentire scene seems to emphasize the bond between the boyand his grandfather.
30. Which is the best version of the underlined part ofsentence 2 (reproduced below) ?
Acclaimed as an artist in the United States and Europeat the turn of the century, Tanner was called the“dean” of art by W. E. B. Du Bois.
(A) (as it is now)(B) century; Tanner was called the “dean” of art by
W. E. B. Du Bois(C) century, Tanner, who was called “dean” of art by
W. E. B. Du Bois(D) century, W. E. B. Du Bois calling Tanner the
“dean” of art(E) century, it was W. E. B. Du Bois who called
Tanner the “dean” of art
31. Which is the best version of the underlined portion ofsentence 4 (reproduced below) ?
And so it remained. and even later. in 1969, thedonation of one of his paintings to the SmithsonianInstitution aroused new interest in the art of thisAmerican master.
(A) (as it is now)(B) remained, and even after that, in 1969,(C) remained, but even then, in 1969,(D) remained until 1969, when(E) remained when in 1969
32. In context, which is the best revision of sentence 6(reproduced below) ?
You can even buy posters of his paintings!
(A) It is amazing, you can buy posters of hispaintings.
(B) Even ordinary people like us can buy posters ofhis paintings.
(C) Posters of his paintings had been sold.(D) People can even buy his paintings as a poster.(E) One can even buy posters of his paintings.
10315
10320
10325
10330
10335
10340
10345
10350
10355
10360
10365
10370
10375
10380
10385
10390
10395
10400
10405
33. In context, which is the best way to revise sentence 7(reproduced below) ?
One of his most famous works is a realistic painting bythe name of “The Banjo Lesson.”
(A) Add “In contrast,” to the beginning of thesentence.
(B) Change “a realistic painting by the name of” to“the realistic painting”.
(C) Delete the words “of his most famous works”.(D) Change “is” to “had been”.(E) Delete “most famous”.
34. Which sentence is best inserted after sentence 7 ?
(A) The painting shows a man teaching his grandsonhow to play the banjo.
(B) He finished “The Banjo Lesson” in 1893.(C) In the painting, a bright light sets off the man and
boy.(D) Banjos came to the United States from West
Africa.(E) Portraits by Tanner show a psychological depth
and compassion.
35. Which is best to add to the beginningof sentence 9 ?
(A) Although it is realistic,(B) You can almost hear the music, but(C) Photographs have a beauty of their own, but(D) As a lifelike work,(E) Some people just copy what they see;
10410
10415
10420
10425
10430
10435
10440
10445
10450
10455
10460
10465
10470
10475
10480
SECTION 8 CRITICAL READING
Time – 20 minutes
19 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
Each sentence below has one or two blanks, each blankindicating that something has been omitted. Beneaththe sentence are five words or sets of words labeled Athrough E. Choose the word or set of words that, wheninserted in the sentence, best fits the meaning of thesentence as a whole.
Example:
Hoping to ------- the dispute, negotiators proposeda compromise that they felt would be ------- to bothlabor and management.
(A) enforce .. useful(B) end .. divisive(C) overcome .. unattractive(D) extend .. satisfactory(E) resolve .. acceptable
1. The writer came to be labeled ------- because sheisolated herself in her apartment, shunning outsidecontact.
(A) a loner (B) a miser (C) a connoisseur(D) a conspirator (E) an ingénue
2. Some Tibetan nomads used yak butter as a -------, onethat often took the place of money in commercialtransactions.
(A) promotion (B) commodity (C) formula(D) refund (E) register
3. Geysers vary widely: some may discharge -------,whereas others may have only a brief explosiveeruption and then remain ------- for hours or days.
(A) violently .. dangerous(B) continuously .. quiescent(C) spontaneously .. unpredictable(D) regularly .. active(E) faintly .. imperceptible
4. Although the administration repeatedly threatened touse its authority in order to ------- the student protestorsinto submission, they refused to be intimidated.
(A) ease (B) delude (C) cajole(D) bully (E) nudge
5. Only after the campaign volunteers became awareof their candidate’s questionable motives could theyrecognize the ------- statements made in his seemingly------- speeches.
(A) insightful .. astute(B) partisan .. callous(C) cordial .. hostile(D) duplicitous .. candid(E) cunning .. surreptitious
6. No longer narrowly preoccupied with their ownnational pasts, historians are increasingly ------- inthat they often take a transnational perspective.
(A) conciliatory (B) bombastic (C) mendacious(D) cosmopolitan (E) jocular
325
10485
10490
10495
10500
10505
10510
10515
10520
10525
10530
10535
10540
10545
10550
The passage below is followed by questions based on its content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or impliedin the passage and in any introductory material that may be provided.
Questions 7-19 are based on tbe following passage.
In the introduction to one of her dramas, a well-knownplaywright and actor discusses some of her ideas aboutacting.
Words have always held a particular power for me.I remember leafing through a book of Native Americanpoems one morning while I was waiting for my Shakespeareclass to begin and being struck by a phrase from the preface,"The word, the word above all, is truly magical, not only byits meaning, but by its artful manipulation."
This quote, which I added to my journal, remindedme of something my grandfather had told me when I wasa girl: "If you say a word often enough it becomes yourown." I added that phrase to my journal next to the quoteabout the magic of words. When I traveled home toBaltimore for my grandfather’s funeral a year after myjournal entry, I mentioned my grandfather’s words to myfather. He corrected me. He told me that my grandfatherhad actually said, "If you say a word often enough, itbecomes you." I was still a student at the time, but I kneweven then, even before I had made a conscious decision toteach as well as act, that my grandfather’s words would beimportant.
Actors are very impressionable people, or some wouldsay, suggestible people. We are trained to develop aspectsof our memories that are more emotional and sensory thanintellectual. The general public often wonders how actorsremember their lines. What’s more remarkable to me ishow actors remember, recall, and reiterate feelings andsensations. The body has a memory just as the mind does.The heart has a memory, just as the mind does. The act ofspeech is a physical act. It is powerful enough that it cancreate, with the rest of the body, a kind of cooperativedance. That dance is a sketch of something that is inside aperson, and not fully revealed by the words alone. I cameto realize that if I were able to record part of the dance – that is, the spoken part-and reenact it, the rest of thebody would follow. I could then create the illusion of beinganother person by reenacting something she had said as shehad said it. My grandfather’s idea led me to consider thatthe reenactment, or the reiteration, of a person’s wordswould also teach me about that person.
I had been trained in the tradition of acting called"psychological realism." A basic tenet of psychologicalrealism is that characters live inside of you and that youcreate a lifelike portrayal of the character through a processof realizing your own similarity to the character. When I
later became a teacher of acting, I began to become moreand more troubled by the self-oriented method. I began to
look for ways to engage my students in putting themselvesin other people’s shoes. This went against the grain of thepsychological realism tradition, which was to get the char-acter to walk in the actor’s shoes. It became less and lessinteresting intellectually to bring the dramatic literature ofthe world into a classroom of people in their late teens andtwenties, and to explore it within the framework of theirreal lives. Aesthetically it seemed limited, because mostof the time the characters all sounded the same. Most char-acters spoke somewhere inside the rhythmic range of thestudents. More troubling was that this method left animportant bridge out of acting. The spirit of acting is thetravel from the self to the other. This "self-based" methodseemed to come to a spiritual halt. It saw the self as theultimate home of the character. To me, the search for char-acter is constantly in motion. It is a quest that moves backand forth between the self and the other.
I needed evidence that you could find a character’s psy-chological reality by "inhabiting" that character’s words. Ineeded evidence of the limitations of basing a character ona series of metaphors from an actor’s real life. I wanted todevelop an alternative to the self-based technique, a tech-nique that would begin with the other and come to the self,a technique that would empower the other to find the actorrather than the other way around.
7. The primary purpose of the first three paragraphs(lines 1-38) is to
(A) describe the actor’s process of developing a role(B) trace the beginnings of a personal philosophy(C) analyze the grandfather’s insights into acting(D) investigate the effect of words on interpersonal
relationships(E) explore a viewpoint that the author is forced to
reverse
8. The author of the passage uses the quotation inlines 5-6 primarily as a
(A) vivid expression of how she views words(B) powerful example of what she sought in
Shakespeare(C) scholarly citation linking her to poetic words(D) comical introduction to a problem encountered by
every dramatic performer(E) pragmatic assessment of the power of words for
beginning drama students
10555
10560
10565
10570
10575
10580
10585
10590
10595
10600
10605
10610
10615
10620
330
9. By presenting both versions of the grandfather’s words(lines 9-10 and lines 15-16), the author primarily conveys the
(A) grandfather’s attempts to play with language(B) grandfather’s enthusiasm in spite of her reaction(C) father’s intervention in a private moment(D) ambivalence she feels toward her grandfather(E) significance of the grandfather’s message
10. The comparisons in lines 26-27 serve primarily to
(A) show the similarities that exist between dancingand acting(B) celebrate the broad range of memories that actorslearn to draw on(C) justify the author’s adherence to conventionalacting theory(D) explain why actors have difficulty interpretingcharacter(E) enhance the author’s credibility as a technicallytrained actor
11. In lines 29-34 (“a kind ... follow”), the author uses theidea of a dance to
(A) supply an image for the awkwardness some actorsexperience(B) illustrate a process that words can set in motion(C) portray the enactment of a character as an exhilaratingexperience(D) argue that acting requires physical agility(E) show how a word can evoke multiple meanings
12. In line 34, “follow” most nearly means
(A) pursue(B) result(C) surpass(D) join in(E) listen carefully
13. In lines 39-62, the author reveals herself to be someonewho believes that
(A) teachers and students should examine controversialissues together(B) playwrights especially benefit from experience on stage(C) conventional approaches should be open toquestioning and reevaluation(D) traditional methods often reflect the accumulatedinsight of generations(E) standard practices are the most suitable to teach tobeginners
14. Lines 39-70 present the author’s argument primarily by
(A) celebrating the appeal of a discredited tradition(B) exploring the impact of her early experiences onher acting(C) explaining her reasons for rejecting a technique(D) describing challenges commonly met by professionalactors .(E) analyzing insights gained from debates with other
drama professors
15. The author’s explanation in the fourth paragraph suggeststhat the "self-oriented method" (line 45) rests onthe assumption that
(A) audience members appreciate complex nuances ofcharacter(B) the playwright’s biography provides the main evidencefor interpreting character(C) actors have already felt the full range of humanemotions(D) actors are extremely independent and self-servingpeople(E) actors’ lives become fulfilled through their dramaticportrayals
16. Which statement best captures the author’s point inlines 54-56 ("Most characters ... students") ?
(A) The characters spoke through the students’ ownrich cadences.(B) Young drama students have an uncanny knack forconveying character.(C) Most students found class to be repetitious.(D) Characterizations were confined by what thestudents knew.(E) The spontaneity that the students had hoped forhad not been achieved.
17. In line 60, the phrase "home of the character" mostnearly means
(A) way of understanding eccentricities(B) social context surrounding a character(C) environment for practicing acting(D) forum in which the self is presented publicly(E) source of a role’s psychological truth
18. In lines 63-64, "psychological reality" describes whichquality?
(A) The versatility of a performer(B) The physical gestures of a character(C) The essence of an identity(D) The accuracy of an audience’s expectations(E) The logical consistency of certain actions
19. The “metaphors” in line 66 are best described as
(A) private misgivings(B) objective observations(C) abstract equations(D) memorable phrases(E) personal comparisons
10625
10630
10635
10640
10645
10650
10655
10660
10665
10670
10675
10680
10685
10690
10695
10700
10705
10710
10715
10720
10725
10730
SECTION 10 WRITING
Time – 10 minutes
14 Questions
Directions: For each question in this section, select the best answer from among the choices given and fill in the correspondingcircle on the answer sheet.
The following sentences test correctness and effectivenessof expression. Part of each sentence or the entire sentenceis underlined; beneath each sentence are five ways ofphrasing the underlined material. Choice A repeats theoriginal phrasing; the other four choices are different. Ifyou think the original phrasing produces a better sentencethan any of the alternatives, select choice A; if not, selectone of the other choices.
In making your selection, follow the requirements ofstandard written English; that is, pay attention to grammar,choice of words, sentence construction, and punctuation.Your selection should result in the most effectivesentence – clear and precise, without awkwardness orambiguity.
EXAMPLE:
Laura Ingalls Wilder published her first bookand she was sixty-five years old then.
(A) and she was sixty-five years old then(B) when she was sixty-five(C) at age sixty-five years old(D) upon the reaching of sixty-five years(E) at the time when she was sixty-five
1. In everything from finding comets to spottingsupernovae, amateur astronomers have become soaccomplished, and professional astronomers sometimesseek their help.
(A) accomplished, and(B) accomplished, also(C) accomplished that(D) accomplished therefore(E) accomplished when
2. Since scientific advances are central to progress, basicresearch deserving continuing support.
(A) basic research deserving continuing support(B) basic research being what deserves continuing
support(C) basic research deserves continuing support(D) continuing support is deserved by basic research(E) continuing support is what they deserve in basic
research
3. With Americans consuming sugar in record amounts,nutritionists are urging the public to reduce itsconsumption of sodas, which have largely replacedother, more healthful, beverages.
(A) nutritionists are urging the public to reduce itsconsumption of sodas. which
(B) nutritionists have been urging that the publicreduces its consumption of sodas; those
(C) the public ought to reduce its consuming of sodas,as urged by nutritionists. because they
(D) nutritionists urge about reducing public sodaconsumption, which
(E) less soda should be consumed by the public, urgenutritionists. which
4. Experts disagree about what is the definition ofintelligence and how to measure it.
(A) what is the definition of intelligence and how tomeasure it
(B) how to define intelligence. and also itsmeasurement
(C) how to define and measure intelligence(D) defining intelligence as well as measurement(E) the definition of intelligence and measuring it
10735
10740
10745
10750
10755
10760
10765
10770
10775
10780
10785
10790
10795
10800
5. The charges against the organization are beinginvestigated by a committee. it includes severalsenators.
(A) committee, it includes(B) committee; it including(C) committee, and it will include(D) committee, they include(E) committee that includes
6. Travel writing often describes a journey of explorationand endurance, a trip that is risky either because ofnatural hazards but also because of political unrest.
(A) but also because of(B) but also due to(C) or because there was(D) or because of(E) or the cause is
7. Though they had earlier indicated otherwise, it waseventually decided upon by the legislators to have thebill passed.
(A) it was eventually decided upon by the legislatorsto have the bill passed
(B) it was eventually decided upon by the legislatorsto pass the bill
(C) the eventual decision of the legislators was forpassage of the bill
(D) the legislators’ eventual decision was passingthe bill
(E) the legislators eventually decided to pass the bill
8. Spread by rat fleas, millions of people in medievalEurope were killed by bubonic plague.
(A) millions of people in medieval Europe were killedby bubonic plague
(B) and millions of medieval Europeans killed bybubonic plague
(C) this led to the killing of millions of medievalEuropeans by bubonic plague
(D) bubonic plague in medieval Europe was whymillions of people were killed
(E) bubonic plague killed millions of people inmedieval Europe
9. Traditional Jamaican music. enriched with rock, jazz,and other modern rhythms from America, were thebasis for reggae.
(A) were the basis for(B) have been a basis for(C) become the basis of(D) was the basis for(E) being the basis of
10. James Barrie, the author of Peter Pan andother plays, is noted for portraying adulthoodas unpleasant and childhood is glorified.
(A) childhood is glorified(B) childhood as being glorious(C) childhood as glorious(D) childhood glorified(E) glorified childhood
11. Medical insurance coverage that requires high monthlypremiums and that is beyond the financial means ofmany people.
(A) that requires high monthly premiums and that is(B) that requires high monthly premiums and it is(C) requiring high monthly premiums are(D) with the requirements of high monthly
premiums are(E) that requires high monthly premiums is
12. Among the most flavorful cuisines in the United States,New Orleans has also become one of the most popular.
(A) New Orleans has also become(B) New Orleans has also become famous as(C) the cuisine of New Orleans is also(D) cuisines in New Orleans also have become(E) also the cuisine of New Orleans is
13. Meals prepared by the Algonquin Indians, who werefarmers as well as hunters, included more maize andpumpkin than other Indian tribes.
(A) pumpkin than other Indian tribes(B) pumpkin than did those prepared by other Indian
tribes(C) pumpkin than that which other Indian tribes did(D) pumpkin, and this was not the same as other
Indian tribes(E) pumpkin; and other Indian tribes did not prepare
meals in this way
14. Born of Ihuza parents in Nigeria, novelist BuchiEmecheta moved to England in 1962, since which shehas lived in North London.
(A) 1962, since which she has lived in North London(B) 1962 and has lived since then in North London(C) 1962, since then she has lived in North London(D) 1962 and lived since then in North London(E) 1962, and living in North London since that lime
335
10805
10810
10815
10820
10825
10830
10835
10840
10845
10850
10855
10860
10865
10870
10875
10880
10885
10890
10895
10900
10905
10910